JP5387327B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, a large number of game situations are set, and the transition of the game situation occurs based on the fact that the transition conditions corresponding to each are established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, for example, an internal lottery is performed based on the entrance of a game ball into a predetermined entrance part provided in the game area, and the game is used in a game player such as a liquid crystal display device. There is known a configuration in which an operation is started, and when the result of the internal lottery is a winning result, the game turning operation is terminated in a state corresponding to the result and the game state is shifted to a winning game state (for example, Patent Literature 1). In this case, the start waiting situation in which the game turning operation is not executed and the winning game state is not executed, the situation in the game turning in which the game turning operation is executed, and the winning game state are set. The situation is set.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the winning game state proceeds by opening and closing the entrance opening provided in the game area a plurality of times, the opening that opens the entrance hole as the situation in the winning game state A situation and a closed situation in which the entrance is maintained in a closed state between successive opening times are set.

By the way, in the slot machine, although the contents of specific games are different, there are configurations in which a number of game situations are set such as a start waiting situation, a situation during game play, and a situation in a winning game state. Known .

JP 2009-213766 A

Here, in a configuration in which a plurality of game situations are set, a configuration capable of suitably performing processing for advancing those game situations is required, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and in a configuration in which a plurality of game situations are set, a gaming machine capable of suitably performing processing for advancing those game situations Is intended to provide.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention described in claim 1 includes a program storage unit storing a processing program,
Control means for controlling the progress of the game by periodically executing periodic processing using the processing program stored in the program storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The program storage means has a first situation, a second situation, and a situation in which the periodic processing is executed a plurality of times when the situation does not occur at the same time in the game process and stays in each situation. Corresponding to each of the third situations, a processing program for the first situation, a processing program for the second situation, and a processing program for the third situation are stored,
A specific gaming situation is set that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The first situation, the second situation, and the third situation respectively correspond to predetermined sections with different execution timings in the specific gaming situation,
The control means includes
An information acquisition means for executing an acquisition process for acquiring progress opportunity information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Trigger information storage means for storing the progress trigger information acquired by the acquisition process;
First situation process execution means for executing a first situation process for controlling the progress of the first situation using the processing program for the first situation;
A second situation process executing means for executing a second situation process for controlling the progress of the second situation using the processing program for the second situation;
Third situation process execution means for executing a third situation process for controlling the progress of the third situation using the processing program for the third situation;
Corresponding to each situation when the first situation, the storable der numerical information in a predetermined range including the numerical information corresponding to each of the second status and the third status is, the condition for each situation is established Situation correspondence storage means for updating the numerical information so as to become
To read out the numerical information stored in the situation corresponding storage means, reads out a processing program corresponding to the numerical information thus read out, one of the first status process, the second status process and the third status processing Means for reading the program to be executed,
With
In the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process, when the corresponding situation ends, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit is updated to the one corresponding to the situation that follows. Yes,
In the process of updating the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means, at least one of initialization for the numerical information immediately before the update and addition of a predetermined value to the numerical information immediately before the update and subtraction of the predetermined value is executed. As described above, each division in the specific game situation including the first situation, the second situation and the third situation is set,
The progress trigger information stored is a configuration that triggers the progress of the specific gaming situation,
The establishment of the acquisition condition is a configuration that occurs even during the progress of the specific gaming situation including the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation,
The acquisition process is set separately from each situation process executed with reference to numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means including the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process. ,
In at least two situations out of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation, an end condition for the situation is satisfied when a predetermined period corresponding to each situation has elapsed since the situation started. It is the composition which becomes
A configuration in which measurement of the predetermined period in a plurality of situations in which an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed is performed using a common period measuring unit,
The control means determines whether or not the measurement of the period in the period measurement means is completed before the program reading means executes the process of reading the processing program, and the measurement of the period is completed. A completion specifying means for setting “1” in the completion specifying storage means in which any one of the data “0” and “1” is set,
Whether each situation process execution unit that executes a situation process corresponding to a situation in which an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has passed sets whether or not “1” is set in the completion specifying storage unit By determining whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed .

According to the present invention, in a configuration in which a plurality of game situations are set, processing for advancing the game situations can be suitably performed.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a variable prize apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that confirmation of generation | occurrence | production of a power failure is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the input port provided in main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process performed by main side MPU, (b) The structure of the 1st winning determination area, the 2nd winning determination area, the 1st post calculation area, and the 2nd post calculation area is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a timing chart for demonstrating the timing which monitors each winning information, (B) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the calculation performed when winning determination is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the timer area | region provided in the main side RWM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an electromagnetic wave detection performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting and effect control processing which are performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop determination process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a game stop state is set based on having detected an electromagnetic wave. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure regarding the electrical connection of a big winning opening detection sensor and winning IC, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the signal input to winning IC. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the input state monitoring process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special figure special electricity address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demonstration display performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state reception process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout output process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection confirmation process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the payout of a prize ball is performed, and a mode that the disconnection check of a 1st signal path | route is performed. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rotary body unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for vibration detection performed by main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a game stop state is set based on having detected vibration. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation | release process of the electromagnetic wave detection in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed in the rear of the inner frame 13. And. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24, and FIG. 4B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 24. FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 33, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, A main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided. In addition, a plurality of general winning ports 31 are provided, and a plurality of through gates 35 are also provided.

  The detection sensors 31a, 31b, 31c, 32e, 33a, 34c, one-to-one correspondence to each general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34, and each through gate 35 are provided. 35a and 35b are provided. These detection sensors 31a to 35b are all disposed on the back side of the game board 24, and the detection results are output to a main control device described later. In addition, although the electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensors 31a to 35b, any sensor can be used as long as the winning of the game ball can be detected individually.

  When the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the upper working port 33 and a ball enters the lower working port 34, three prize balls are paid out and a general prize is awarded. When the entrance to the mouth 31 occurs, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the entrance to the variable prize winning device 32 occurs, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 33, 34 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 34 than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 33. It may be different. Further, the number of winning balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other winning balls, and may be configured to be smaller than the number of winning balls related to the general winning opening 31, for example.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 are entered. The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 34a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination driving unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operation port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 34.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 34a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 34 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. . The open / close door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32c provided integrally as the variable winning device 32 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery.

  In addition, the variable winning device 32 is formed with a winning passage portion 32d at a position where a game ball that has won the variable winning device 32 through the large winning opening 32a always passes. The big prize opening detection sensor 32e is provided so that the detection part exists at the position. The game balls won in the variable winning device 32 are individually detected by the large winning opening detection sensor 32e.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of a symbol (or variable display or switching display), and a center frame 42 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  In the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  A symbol, which is a kind of symbol, is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”, respectively, and a sub symbol composed of shell-shaped symbols. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed. In the game times corresponding to the occurrence of a low probability winning result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any one of the active lines is formed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the occurrence of a low winning and winning big hit result which will be described later, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “3. 4.1 ") is formed.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed when the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in a partial area | region of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the game board 24 is provided with a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b as abnormality detection means.

  The magnet detection sensor 24 a is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working port 33. As described above, since the upper operating port 33 is a trigger for the internal lottery, an act of inducing the game ball to the upper operating port 33 illegally by bringing a magnet near the upper operating port 33 in front of the window panel 57. is assumed. On the other hand, when the magnet detection sensor 24a is provided, it is possible to detect an unauthorized act using the magnet. The magnet detection sensor 24a is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the detection result of the magnet detection sensor 24a is input to the main controller.

  In addition, the position of the magnet detection sensor 24a is not limited to the above-described one. For example, in order to suppress an illegal act to illegally enter the general winning opening 31 using the magnet, A magnet detection sensor 24 a may be disposed around the general winning award 31.

  The radio wave detection sensor 24 b is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. In more detail about this position, the radio wave detection sensor 24b is disposed at substantially the same height position as both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 in the height direction, and the upper operation port 33 and The game machine main body 12 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the lower operation port 34. Here, since a payout device, which will be described later, for paying out the game ball is disposed at a position closer to the rotation base end side of the gaming machine main body 12, the radio wave detection sensor 24b has a working port device and a payout device in the lateral direction. It can be said that it is arranged between.

  As described above, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are triggers for internal lottery. Therefore, the upper operating port detection sensor outputs a radio wave illegally toward the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in front of the pachinko machine 10. It is assumed that 33a or the lower working port detection sensor 34c causes an erroneous detection of the passing of the game ball. On the other hand, when the radio wave detection sensor 24b is provided, it is possible to detect an illegal act using the radio wave. The radio wave detection sensor 24b is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is input to the main control device.

  Note that the position of the radio wave detection sensor 24b is not limited to the above-described one, and may be, for example, closer to the rotating front end of the gaming machine body 12 than the operating port device. You may arrange | position in the height position between 32. The radio wave detection sensor 24b can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz as a predetermined frequency. However, the radio wave detection sensor 24b can detect radio waves having a frequency that can cause erroneous detection of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. For example, the range of the frequency is arbitrary, and the frequency range to be detected may be changed.

  An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. A ball feeding device 53 that supplies game balls onto the launch rail 52 and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail are provided. By operating a firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window part 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent of synthetic resin, and the game area is visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Around the window portion 56, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 58 a is provided above the window part 56 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, a pair of left and right error lamp portions 58b are provided on the left and right sides of the display lamp portion 58a and on the upper corner portion of the front door frame 14. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 59 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided adjacent to the error lamp portion 58b.

  Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 61 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 61a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 for controlling the main game, and voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. A voice light emission control device 72 is mounted.

  In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening | release to the board | substrate box 71a of the main control apparatus 71, or leaving the trace of the open | release. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is bonded when peeled off A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 71a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71 and the sound emission controller 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 77 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 75 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player A power supply and launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply / launch control device 79 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 78 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 6, supply lines for operating power from the power supply and launch control device 79 to the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78 are indicated by double arrows, and other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid arrows. .

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board (power interruption monitoring board) 96 that monitors the power source. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 and an RWM 94.

  The ROM 93 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The RWM 94 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storing and storing SRWM, DRWM, etc. for both reading and writing, and can be randomly accessed and the same. Compared with the ROM 93, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 93. The RWM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93.

  In addition to the above elements, the MPU 92 or the main control board 91 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RWM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured as a separate chip. The same applies to control devices other than the main control device 71.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. Note that an input / output port may be provided and switched between input and output as necessary. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71. Various control devices are connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 92, and various sensors, various drive units, and various display units are connected. First, a configuration related to connection with various sensors, various drive units, and various display units will be described.

  On the input side of the MPU 92, winning detection sensors 31a, 31b, 31c provided for the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34 and the through gate 35 in the game area are provided. 32e, 33a, 34c, 35a, 35b (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 31a-35b) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 91 and each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b may be connected via one electrical wiring, and the relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. Also good. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. In the MPU 92, signals are received from the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b through the winning IC 95 mounted on the main control board 91, and a winning determination (speech determination) is made to each winning portion based on the reception result. Is called.

  The winning IC 95 is a path abnormality confirmation means or a path abnormality confirmation circuit. Whether or not normal signal transmission is performed between each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b and the MPU 92 is confirmed by the winning IC 95. Details of this confirmation will be described later.

  In addition to the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, a magnet detection sensor 24a and a radio wave detection sensor 24b are electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 92 via electric wiring. The MPU 92 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 24a and the radio wave detection sensor 24b, and based on the reception results, determines whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred.

  On the output side of the MPU 92, a variable winning drive unit 32 c that opens and closes the open / close door 32 b of the variable winning device 32 and an electric combination drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric combination 34 a of the lower working port 34 are electrically wired. It is electrically connected via. Further, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 92 via electric wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 91, and the MPU 92 performs drive control of the various drive units 32 c and 34 b and performs display control of the various display units 43 and 44 through the driver circuit.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

  Incidentally, although illustration explanation is omitted, an external terminal plate 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information according to the progress of the game in the RWM 94. Then, setting for signal output is performed on the external terminal board 81 according to the information set in the RWM 94, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

  Next, a configuration related to communication between the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78 will be described. Prior to the description of the configuration related to these communications, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 78 will be described first.

  The payout control device 78 includes a payout control board 101 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 77. An MPU 102 is mounted on the payout control board 101. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 and an RWM 104. In the following description, the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RWM 94 provided in the main control device 71 are distinguished from the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RWM 94 provided in the main control device 71. The MPU 102, the ROM 103, and the RWM 104 provided in the payout control device 78 are referred to as the RWM 94, and are referred to as the payout side MPU 102, the payout side ROM 103, and the payout side RWM 104.

  The payout-side ROM 103 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The payout side ROM 103 stores various control programs executed by the payout side MPU 102 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RWM 104 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRWM and DRWM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout-side ROM 103. In the payout side RWM 104, various data and the like are temporarily stored when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 103 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout side MPU 102 or the payout control board 101 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The payout side MPU 102 is electrically connected to the payout device 77. The payout device 77 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 76 to the payout device 77 does not flow downstream and a state in which the game ball is sent out downstream. A payout motor 77a for driving a ball stopper member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 77b for individually detecting the game balls sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 77a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 102 via an electric wiring, and a payout detection sensor 77b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 102 via an electric wiring. Yes. In the payout side MPU 102, the payout motor 77a is supplied with a drive signal through a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 101 to cause the game ball to be paid out, and the payout is completed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 77b. Know the number of game balls.

  Further, the payout-side MPU 102 is electrically connected to a ball lending connection terminal plate 105 provided in the back pack unit 15 through electric wiring, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 105 is connected to a ball lending device through electric wiring. Y is electrically connected.

  The ball lending device Y is a so-called CR unit, which is provided on the side of the outer frame 11, although not illustrated, and a card insertion slot is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. Lending game balls corresponding to the amount of money stored in the card by inserting a card into the card insertion slot and manually operating a lending operation device (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 as appropriate. Can be received. The payout-side MPU 102 performs control of renting by transmitting and receiving electrical signals to and from the ball lending device Y.

  In addition, what is inserted into the ball lending device Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be cash or a coin in which cash information is stored. In addition to the payout device 77 and the ball lending device Y, the payout side MPU 102 is electrically connected to a fullness detection sensor for detecting whether a ball tray such as the lower plate 62a is full of game balls. In addition, a ballless detection sensor that detects whether the tank 76 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

  The payout MPU 102 controls payout of game balls based on communication with the main MPU 92. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 91 and the payout control device 78.

  In detail, the main MPU 92 receives a winning ball toward the payout MPU 102 when the winning MPU 92 confirms winning in the winning portion corresponding to the generation of the winning ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. A command (payout command information) is transmitted, but a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. Specifically, there are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and each prize ball command consists of 2-byte information.

  In performing the prize ball command communication, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication. That is, the information of multiple bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. Note that the first signal path SL1 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 91 and the payout control board 101 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  As signal paths for transmitting information from the payout MPU 102 to the main MPU 92, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided. The second signal path SL2 is used for transmitting a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout MPU 102 to the main MPU 92. The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating the completion of the prize ball and the number of the prize balls completed, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the game ball payout, And an abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been canceled. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. The predetermined abnormality related to the game ball payout includes, for example, a state where the lower plate 62a is full and a state where there is no ball in the tank 76.

  In communication of the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, a plurality of bits of information included in the payout status command are sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 91 and the payout control board 101 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout MPU 102 toward the main MPU92. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 102 to the main MPU 92 so that the main MPU 92 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command. Note that the effect of the presence of the payout permission signal will be described later.

  The payout permission signal is composed of 1-bit information, and a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and an HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. The However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the prize ball command output is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is outputted when the prize ball command output is permitted. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The third signal path SL3 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 91 and the payout control board 101 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  Here, the command communication between the main side MPU 92 and the payout side MPU 102 is not the parallel communication but the serial communication, so that the electrical wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 91 and the payout control board 101 is assumed. Even if an illegal act using a so-called hanging board to connect an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden in an electric wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally receive a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 91 and the payout control board 101 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 92 and the payout MPU 102, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned unauthorized board becomes It becomes easy to hide by electric wiring. On the other hand, when the command communication is performed by serial communication, the illegal board is not easily hidden by the electric wiring, and it is easy to find it when the board is temporarily installed.

  Next, a configuration related to electrical connection between the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78 and the power source and launch control device 79 will be described.

  The power supply and launch control device 79 includes a power supply and launch control board 111, and the power supply and launch control board 111 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 71 and the payout control device 78. A power supply circuit 112 is provided. The power supply circuit 112 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 113 and a power-off power supply unit 114.

  The power-on power supply unit 113 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and each of the main control device 71, the payout control device 78, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Is generated, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main controller 71, the payout controller 78, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 113 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied via the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15 and + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main controller 71, the payout controller 78, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  A power failure monitoring board 96 is provided in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 113 and the main MPU 92. The power failure monitoring board 96 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 113. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the main MPU 92 corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. . The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

  The power supply unit for power interruption 114 is composed of a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 113 is used. Charged. Further, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or in a power cut-off state such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off), the main power unit 114 is discharged from the power interruption time. Storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the side RWM 94. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RWM 94 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storage holding is supplied from the power supply unit 114 for power interruption.

  Incidentally, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RWM 94 before the power cut is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). . Further, the power interruption power supply unit 114 is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power in the power interruption unit 114 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control board 111 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 114 for power interruption. In the power supply and launch control board 111, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply is less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing discharges for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 92 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  Here, the configuration relating to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 112 to the main MPU 92 and the payout MPU 102 will be described in detail.

  The power from the power-on power supply unit 113 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main MPU 92 and the VCC terminal of the payout MPU 102. In a situation where power is supplied from the commercial power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 92 and 102, and information is stored and held in the RWMs 94 and 104. Is called.

  On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 114 for power interruption is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 92 but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout MPU 102. In other words, the power for storing data from the power supply unit 114 for power interruption is supplied to the main RWM 94 but is not supplied to the payout RWM 104. Therefore, in the situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RWM 94 stores and holds information, but the payout RWM 104 does not store and hold information. Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 102 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  As described above, the storage holding power from the power interruption time power supply unit 114 is supplied to the main RWM 94 but not supplied to the payout side RWM 104, thereby reducing the capacity of the power interruption power supply unit 114. Is planned. Thereby, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 112, the power supply and launch control board 111 is provided with a launch control circuit 115 responsible for launch control of game balls. The firing control circuit 115 is provided with a transmission circuit 116 that satisfies a condition, a receiving circuit 117 that is permitted to fire, and a launching IC 118.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 116 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 92 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the firing control circuit 115 has a touch sensor 55a for detecting that the annular handle portion of the firing handle 55 is touched by the player, and a game even when the handle portion is being rotated. A ball stop switch 55b that is manually operated by the player to stop the ball firing is electrically connected. The launch control circuit 115 is electrically connected to the payout control board 101 and receives a signal indicating whether or not the ball lending device Y is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal board 105. To do.

  The transmission circuit 116 that satisfies the condition receives a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 55a, and receives a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated from the ball stop switch 55b. Further, when a signal indicating that the ball lending device Y is connected is received from the payout side MPU 102, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 92. . If any of the above signals has not been received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main MPU 92. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  The launch permission receiving circuit 117 receives the HI level launch permission transmitted from the main MPU 92 on the condition that the HI level condition fulfillment signal is transmitted from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 116 to the main MPU 92. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the launch IC 118 when the launch permission signal is received. The main side MPU 92 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when it does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 116. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main side MPU 92 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition establishment signal is started, and at the end of reception of the HI level condition establishment signal, The transmission permission signal is terminated.

  When the launch IC 118 receives a launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission reception circuit 117, the launch IC 118 receives each of the launch solenoid 54 and the ball feeder 53 of the game ball launch mechanism 51. It has a function of outputting a drive signal periodically. In this case, launch IC 118 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 53 than in the firing solenoid 54 so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the firing rail 52. .

  The launch handle 55 is provided with the handle portion as described above, and the greater the amount of operation of the handle portion, the stronger the launch strength of the game ball by the launch solenoid 54. In this case, the firing handle 55 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the handle portion, and the firing IC 118 supplies the firing solenoid 54 through a voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the driving signal to be transmitted. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 118, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 118 and the launch solenoid 54.

  Next, a configuration related to electrical connection between the main control device 71 and the sound emission control device 72 will be described.

  A sound emission control device 72 is connected to the output side of the main MPU 92. The sound emission control device 72 controls the display lamp unit 58a, the error lamp unit 58b, and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main MPU 92 and transmits the command to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control display of an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The command transmission from the main MPU 92 to the sound emission control device 72 is performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 92 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, display setting of the accessory display unit 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 fluctuate. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation for determining display continuation time in main display unit 43 and symbol display device 41 The type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 94a of the RWM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a holding storage area 94b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. Is done.

  The holding storage area 94b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the main ROM 93. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the holding storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable prize winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize winning opening 32a. A game that continues until is satisfied. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, one opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations (opening durations) from when the big winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Has been. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 seconds, which is a long open duration, and a short time set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the large winning opening 32a. When the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short-time manner, it is expected that no winning will be made to the big winning opening 32a or even if a winning will occur.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened once in a round manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  It should be noted that the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one open and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 is higher than that in the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. High frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) and low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 35) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, , Shorten the one time variable display time in the display 44 for an accessory), shorten the average time of the reserved time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 93. Then, as such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result (low-probability-specific special game result), a low-winning high-probability jackpot result (explicit high-probability-corresponding game result or a result that becomes suddenly probable), High-probability special game result) is set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  As a kind of high-accuracy big hit result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An implicit low winning high probability jackpot result (a game result corresponding to an implicit high probability or a result of a latent probability changing state) may be included. In this case, the jackpot result can be further diversified.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-mentioned non-explicit low winning high probability winning result and the special outlier result are set, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is changed to the previous mode. It is common to be maintained in the mode, but the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, so that, for example, in the normal gaming state, one of the unclear low winning high probability winning result or the special outage result When it occurs, it is possible to make the player predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 94b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The reach display includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 41 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that a variable display state is likely to result in a special display result.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode. In game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 93 supports the occurrence of reach display. It is executed when

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 92 determines the variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time (display duration) in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of a main process and a timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The variation type counter CS is used for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 43 and at the time of variation variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The value of CS is acquired. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the main ROM 93 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory reservation area 94c provided in the main RWM 94 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 92>
Next, each process performed in order to advance the game in the main side MPU 92 will be described. The main MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on way and the process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RWM 94 is permitted, and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set in step S103.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RWM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 79 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RWM 94. It is determined whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RWM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RWM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RWM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RWM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RWM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RWM erase switch has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal, and the process of step S109 is not executed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RWM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the voice light emission control device 72 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RWM 104 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 102. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RWM 94, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Here, as described above, since the random number initial value update process and the variation counter update process are only set in the remaining process so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt disable process and the interrupt enable process, the timer interrupt process The timing of starting is always immediately before step S110. Then, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is only necessary to start from step S110, and the return address after the timer interrupt process is unambiguous. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt process, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced.

  In addition, since the timer interrupt process does not occur during the calculation of predetermined data in the main MPU 92, the main data stored at that time in the register of the main MPU 92 at the start of the timer interrupt process. There is no need to execute save processing to the side RWM 94, and similarly, there is no need to execute data return processing to the register of the main MPU 92 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt process is also reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counter CINI or during the update of the variation type counter CS, these counters are not updated during the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent numerical information from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 92 will be described. The main control board 91 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 92. A peripheral circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 92. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 92 at intervals of a specific period of 4 msec. The main MPU 92 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts the timer interrupt process with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 92, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 92, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 92 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. Although details will be described later, in the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 96. Run.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped, and if the progress of the game is to be stopped, the process for advancing the game is executed. Stop.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the process of the transition to step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S209, a signal received from each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is read, and a winning detection process for executing a process corresponding to the read information is executed. In step S210, timer update processing is performed for updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RWM 94 in a lump.

  In subsequent step S211, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is performed, and in step S212, firing control for performing game ball firing control is performed. Execute the process. Further, in step S213, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. Check.

  In the subsequent step S214, a special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Execute the ordinary power control process to perform. In step S216, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 43 in the first hold lamp unit 45 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 to the second hold lamp unit 46 is set. In step S216, the output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S217, a demonstration display process is performed to make the display content of the symbol display device 41 for standby display in a situation where both the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In step S218, The contents of the command and signal received from the payout-side MPU 102 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed.

  In subsequent step S220, the state of signal output to the external terminal board 81 is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal in accordance with the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. Execute external information setting process. In step S221, a process for editing the test fire test information is executed.

  In addition, the winning detection process of step S209, the timer update process of step S210, the fraud detection process of step S211, the launch control process of step S212, the input state monitoring process of step S213, the special figure special electric control process of step S214, the step S215 The ordinary power transmission control process, the demonstration display process in step S217, the payout state reception process in step S218, and the payout output process in step S219 will be individually described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processing of steps S207 to S221 is executed, the process proceeds to step S222. In step S222, an interrupt end declaration is set. In the main MPU 92, once timer interrupt processing is started, it is determined that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the timer interrupt processing. In step S223, interrupt permission is set. In the main MPU 92, once the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt prohibition state is set. Therefore, in step S223, an interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Power failure information storage processing>
Next, the power failure information storage process executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the power failure information storage process, first, in step S301, information “10”, which is the number of times of repetition for power failure signals, is set in a repeat counter provided in the main RWM 94, and in step S302, the main RWM 94 is set. The information of the power failure detection counter provided in is initialized.

  In a succeeding step S303, a process for reading the information of the power failure signal received in the input port of the main side MPU 92 is executed. In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power shutdown has not occurred is received, information of “0” is stored as non-power failure information in the input port. When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received, information “1” is stored as power interruption occurrence information in the input port. In step S303, a process of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the main MPU 92 is executed.

  In subsequent step S304, it is determined whether or not the information of the power failure signal read in step S303 corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure (power failure occurrence). In the case where it corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure, in step S305, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter, and then the process proceeds to step S306. It progresses to step S306, without performing the process of step S304.

  In step S306, an update process is executed so as to subtract 1 from the numerical information of the repetition counter. Thereafter, in step S307, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the repetition counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the processing in steps S303 to S306 has been executed for the number of repetitions set in step S301. If a negative determination is made in step S307, the process returns to step S303, and the processes in steps S303 to S306 are repeated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current numerical value information of the power failure detection counter is “8” or more as a result of executing the processing of step S303 to step S306 for the number of repetitions. If it is less than the trigger reference number, the power failure information storage process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the number is the trigger reference number or more, the power failure processing (power failure processing) in steps S309 to S312 is executed. Specifically, first, in step S309, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RWM 94, and in the subsequent step S310, checksum calculation processing is executed. The checksum calculated here is stored in the main RWM 94. Thereafter, in step S311, all the information on the output ports of the main RWM 94 are set to “0”, and access to the main RWM 94 is prohibited in step S312. Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, there is no need to execute the timer interrupt process in the middle of the power recovery. As a result, it is not necessary to store the address of the process executed when the power failure occurs in the main RWM 94 as stack information, and the processing load of the process when the power failure occurs can be reduced.

  Here, the effect of confirming the occurrence of a power failure as described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the function and effect.

  When a commercial power failure or a power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing t1, the power failure signal becomes an HI level signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption. Thereafter, the power failure information storage process is started at the timing t2, so that the repetition count information is set in the repetition counter and the information of the power failure detection counter is initialized.

  Thereafter, the first step S303 to step S306 processing (hereinafter also referred to as power failure confirmation processing) is executed at the timing t3, so that the numerical information of the repeated counter is decremented by 1, and the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is also updated. One is added. Further, the next power failure confirmation process is executed at the timing of t4. However, at this timing, the power failure signal is in a state corresponding to the fact that the power cut-off has not occurred even though the power cut-off has occurred due to the occurrence of electrical noise. Therefore, although the numerical information of the repetitive counter is decremented by 1 at the timing, the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is not updated.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the power failure confirmation process is executed for the number of times set in the counter repeatedly regardless of whether or not the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption. Therefore, even after confirming that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure confirmation process is continued even if it is confirmed that the power interruption has not occurred.

  After that, at the timing from t5 to t10, it is confirmed that the influence of electrical noise disappears and the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption. Therefore, at each timing, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetitive counter, and 1 is added to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter. Further, at the timing of t11, the influence of electrical noise occurs again, and the power failure signal is information corresponding to the fact that the power supply is not cut off, so only 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetitive counter. . In addition, at the timing of t12, it is confirmed that the influence of electrical noise disappears, the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, and the numerical information of the repetitive counter is decremented by 1, and the power failure detection counter Numeric information is incremented by one.

  After that, by confirming that the numerical information of the repetition counter is “0” at the timing of t13, the main MPU 92 grasps that the power failure confirmation processing for the number of repetitions has been completed. Therefore, the power failure process is started at the timing t13.

  As described above, the power failure processing is not executed by confirming the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption once, but the power failure processing is executed when the reception of the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times. By doing in this way, it can suppress that the process at the time of a power failure will be performed when the power failure signal suddenly changes to the thing corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of a power interruption interruption | blocking by the influence of electrical noise etc.

  In addition, if the power supply is completely shut down without power failure processing when the power is cut off, the power failure flag is not set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and saved In a situation where it is not performed, the processing in the main MPU 92 is terminated. Then, the main RWM 94 is initialized at the next power recovery, and there is a concern that the prize ball will be invalidated and that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be lost. . Under such circumstances, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the power failure confirmation processing is executed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing at the time of power failure is started within the range of the processing times. It is preferable.

  In addition, due to the influence of electrical noise, etc., in the situation where the power is cut off, the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption suddenly changes to the one corresponding to the state where the power interruption has not occurred. There is concern. In this case, if the condition for executing the power failure process is set to continuously check the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown, the power shutdown has occurred. Nevertheless, due to the influence of the electrical noise, the main MPU 92 does not recognize that the power supply has been cut off, and there is a concern that the power supply may be cut off completely without executing the power failure process. On the other hand, if the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed more than the trigger reference number (repetition count> trigger reference number) within the range where the power failure confirmation processing is performed for the predetermined number of repetitions, the power failure processing is executed. In this way, by removing the continuity of confirmation from the conditions for executing the process at the time of power failure, even when there is an influence of electrical noise as described above, the process at the time of power failure can be executed satisfactorily.

  Further, in order to execute the process at the time of power failure, it is necessary to confirm the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption three times or more. In a configuration in which the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation may be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence of the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. Concerned. On the other hand, since it is necessary to confirm the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption as described above three times or more, the power failure signal output corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is continued during the time of power failure. The period required for executing the process becomes somewhat long. Therefore, the possibility of the power failure process being executed due to the occurrence of electrical noise is reduced.

  Incidentally, there is a minimum processing time required to execute one step of processing in the main MPU 92, and it is necessary to execute a plurality of steps of processing to complete one power failure confirmation processing. That is, a predetermined time is required from the start of one power failure confirmation process to the start of the next power failure confirmation process. For example, when the time required to execute the process of one step is 1.2 μsec, it takes 4.8 μsec to execute one power failure confirmation process. And when the said power failure confirmation process is performed 10 times, it will take about 50 microseconds to start the process at the time of a power failure. On the other hand, the time from when the power is shut off until the main MPU 92 can no longer execute processing (for example, the time until the reset signal output to the main MPU 92 is started) is set to about 10 msec. Then, even if the power failure confirmation process is executed a plurality of times as described above, the power failure process can be completed sufficiently.

  In addition, if the number of repetitions that is the confirmation reference number is 3 or more and the trigger reference number is less than the repeat number and 2 or more, the specific values of the repetition number and the trigger reference number are arbitrary. .

<Winning detection process>
Next, the winning detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the winning detection process, a process of confirming the detection results in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is executed. In this confirmation, the input port of the main MPU 92 is confirmed. Prior to the description of the winning detection process, an electrical configuration for inputting the detection results of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

  The input port 92a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

  Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 92a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 92a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the winning detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 92a is set to each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b.

  In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 32e, and the first bit D1 is information corresponding to the winning signal from the upper working opening detection sensor 33a. Is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the lower working port detection sensor 34c, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the first winning port detection sensor 31a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second winning mouth detection sensor 31b, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the third winning mouth detection sensor 31c. The 6 bits D6 store information corresponding to the winning signal from the first gate detection sensor 35a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second gate detection sensor 35b. There are stored.

  In this case, each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b outputs a HI level signal indicating that a winning ball is not being detected as a winning signal when it has not detected the passing of a gaming ball, and passes the gaming ball. If it is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that it is being detected is output as a winning signal. However, the main control board 91 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before the detection signals are input to the input port 92a. When the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the input port 92a stores “0” information (data 0 or no information) for the corresponding bit, and receives the HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If it is, information “1” (data 1 or presence information) is stored for the corresponding bit.

  That is, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In a detected state, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  Each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b outputs a LOW level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a game ball, and also outputs an HI level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a gaming ball. May be configured to output. In this case, the inverting circuit may be omitted.

  In the winning detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13A, first, in step S401, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 92. A process of shifting to the first winning determination area WA1 is executed. The first winning determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 13 (b-1), and stores all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first winning determination area WA1 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit D0. Is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first winning determination area WA1.

  In the subsequent step S402, a wait process for winning detection is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 92 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In this pachinko machine 10, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, but it does not disturb the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and the effects described below are sufficiently exerted by setting the wait process. However, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  Incidentally, as already explained, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S402 is not set, a forcible wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S401 and S403. In this regard, in step S402, not only the minimum time required for executing the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S401 and the process of step S403.

  In the subsequent step S403, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second winning determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 92 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update at the input port 92a is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S401 to the start of step S403, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S403. The information migrated from can be different from that in step S401.

  Similarly to the first winning determination area WA1, the second winning determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 13 (b-2), and is stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. The data capacity is sufficient to store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second winning determination area WA2 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the storage source bits are further determined. And the storage destination bit are the same as in the first winning determination area WA1.

  Thereafter, in step S404, after the winning determination process is executed, the main winning detection process is ended. Here, the winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning determination process, first, in step S501, 8 is set in a winning determination counter provided in the main RWM 94. In subsequent step S502, each bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 92a.

  In subsequent step S503, AND processing of each information grasped in step S502 is executed, and the AND processing result is stored in a register. In step S504, the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are stored. Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the winning detection processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 13 (b-3) and 13 (b-4), and each of the first winning determination areas WA1. The data capacity is capable of storing all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second winning determination area WA2. In this case, the order of bits in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 subjected to AND processing and the order of each bit in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are unambiguous. Is stipulated.

  After that, in step S505, information on the result of AND processing in the winning determination processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 is stored. Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is read. In step S506, an inversion process for inverting the read information between “0” and “1” is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S507, AND processing is performed on the AND processing result information in step S503 and the inversion processing result information in step S506. In subsequent step S508, the AND processing result is used as winning detection start information. It is determined whether or not the corresponding value is “1”.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the AND processing result is “1”, the numerical information of the current winning determination counter corresponds to either the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 in step S509. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. If it corresponds to either the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, “1” is set to the working winning flag provided in the main side RWM 94 in step S510, and in step S511, the main winning flag is set. 1 is added to the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the side RWM 94.

  The operation winning flag is a process corresponding to winning in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, and is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 that processing other than execution of the prize ball should be executed. It is. By the way, in the configuration in which the winning detection sensors 33a and 34c are provided for the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the timer for the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34 is a timer. It may be grasped at the same time within the range of one processing of interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the operation winning flag is provided corresponding to the number of the operation ports 33 and 34, and specifically, two operation winning flags are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times to output a three prize ball command instructing execution of the three prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S509, it is determined in step S512 whether the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If it corresponds to the variable winning device 32, “1” is set to the large winning flag provided in the main RWM 94 in step S513, and 15 pieces provided in the main RWM 94 in step S514. 1 is added to the numerical information of the prize ball counter.

  The big winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 that processing corresponding to winning in the variable winning device 32 and processing other than execution of the winning ball should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S512, it is determined in step S515 whether the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, “1” is set to the through flag provided in the main RWM 94 in step S516. If a negative determination is made in step S515, it means that the current winning is corresponding to the general winning opening 31, so in step S517 the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main side RWM 94 are displayed. Add 1 to the numerical information.

  The through flag is a flag for the main MPU 92 to specify that the process corresponding to the winning to the through gate 35 is to be executed. The 10-award ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times to output a 10-award ball command for instructing the execution of 10 award balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S508, or after any one of steps S511, S514, S516, and S517 is executed, the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, the winning determination counter is decremented by 1, and then it is determined in step S519 whether or not the winning determination counter is “0”.

  If it is not “0”, the processing from step S502 to step S517 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the winning determination counter updated in step S518. When the processes in steps S502 to S517 are executed for the numerical information set in step S501, an affirmative determination is made in step S519, and the award determination process is terminated by making an affirmative determination. .

  Next, by performing the winning detection process (FIG. 13), whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34 and the through gate 35 in the game area. The manner of detection will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as winning information) in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each winning information.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process for monitoring the winning information is 2 times in each process of the timer interrupt process. Times (step S401, step S403). The process of monitoring each set of winning information is executed so that the timing is changed, but the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side (step S401) is time T2 with respect to the timing at which the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed at the timing when.

  In this case, the timing at which the winning detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process whose time is likely to fluctuate, such as fraud detection process, launch control process, special figure special electric control process, and ordinary figure ordinary electric control process. In addition, the processing that is executed prior to the winning detection processing in the timer interrupt processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively difficult to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is started in the timer interrupt process for each processing time is the same, substantially the same or similar at T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is periodically executed.

  Among the processes for monitoring each set of winning information, between the process for monitoring the winning information on the front side (step S401) and the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side (step S403), The wait process (step S402) is executed, but in such a wait process, no process is executed and only a wait is made until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15B, the contents of the calculation executed when the winning determination is performed will be described. FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the calculation executed when winning determination is performed. Actually, various operations are performed in units of 1 bit, but in the following description, the contents of the operations will be described in units of 1 byte. However, a configuration in which an operation in units of 1 byte as described below is actually performed may be employed.

  In the case of FIG. 15B, first, in the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side in the n-th timer interrupt process, “00100000” is displayed in the first winning determination area WA1, as shown in FIG. 15B1. It is set. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, the winning information of the third winning mouth detection sensor 31c is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as winning information), The sensor winning information is information indicating that no game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as “no winning information”).

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the n-th timer interrupt process, “10100000” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 15 (B2). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b and the third winning opening detection sensor 31c is winning information, and the other sensors are winning information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “00100000” as shown in FIG. This is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as a monitoring result of the winning information in the timer interruption processing of the n-th processing time. If the winning information monitoring result is set in the first post-computation area WA3 in the (n-1) th timer interrupt processing, the winning information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing is the second post-computation area. Set to WA4. Also, the winning determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the winning information at the (n-1) th time and the monitoring result of the winning information at the nth time, but the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 15 (B4), “10100110” is set in the first winning determination area WA1 in the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b, the third winning opening detection sensor 31c, the lower working opening detection sensor 34c, and the upper working opening detection sensor 33a becomes winning information. The other sensors have no winning information.

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “101000110” is set in the second winning determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 15 (B5). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b, the third winning opening detection sensor 31c, and the upper working opening detection sensor 33a is winning information, and the other sensors are winning. There is no information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “1010001” as shown in FIG. 15 (B6), and the information is This is set in the second post-computation area WA4 as a result of monitoring the winning information in the timer interruption process of the (n + 1) th processing.

  Thereafter, in the winning determination process (FIG. 14) in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process, first, the monitoring result of the winning information in the nth timer interrupt process is read out from the first post-calculation area WA3 and the read out monitoring. Inversion processing is performed on the resulting information. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the result of monitoring the winning information in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process is ANDed with respect to the information on the result of the inversion process. This results in “10000010” as shown in FIG. 15 (B8). In this case, in the winning determination process, it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the second gate detection sensor 35b, and it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the upper working port detection sensor 33a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (B4), the lower working port detection sensor 34c is the winning presence information in the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This is caused by noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no winning information to information with winning information, it is not immediately determined that winning has occurred. It is. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 15 (B5), in the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, the lower working port detection sensor 34c is no-winning information, and electrical noise is generated. Are not treated as winning game balls.

  The speed of the game ball is relatively fast by performing the confirmation of the winning information as described above a plurality of times within the range of one processing time instead of performing the timer interruption processing for a plurality of processing times. Even if the detection positions of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are passed, it can be accurately detected. For example, in a configuration in which a ball passage is formed so that a game ball passes through the detection positions of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b at a maximum speed of about 10 msec, each timer interrupt process periodically started at a cycle of 4 msec If the process of monitoring the winning information is executed once in each processing time, there is a possibility that the passage is missed. On the other hand, the occurrence of such an oversight can be reduced by confirming the winning information a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing.

  Further, the process of monitoring the first-side winning information and the process of monitoring the second-side winning information are periodically executed as already described. As a result, the occurrence of an event in which the period during which the winning information is not monitored is locally extended is suppressed, and the possibility of missing a game ball from this point is also reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of an event in which the period during which the winning information is not monitored is locally increased is suppressed, for example, the n-th timer is detected as in the current detection by the second gate detection sensor 35b. Even if the detection of the passage of the game ball is started during the interruption process, it can be grasped without missing the passage.

  However, in the configuration in which the same winning signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation is performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence due to the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, a wait process for winning detection (step S402) between the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side and the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in one timer interrupt process (step S402). Further, the wait time is set so that the influence of electrical noise does not extend over the process of monitoring a set of winning information. Therefore, the winning of the game ball is not erroneously detected due to the influence of electrical noise.

  The wait process is a process for waiting in the main MPU 92 without executing other processes. As a result, the wait time is prevented from fluctuating, and an interval when the winning signals output from the same winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are checked twice in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Is made constant. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time required from the start of detection of the game ball by the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b until it is determined that the winning has occurred varies greatly depending on the progress of the game.

  Further, the third prize opening detection sensor 31c receives a winning information in each of a process for monitoring a set of winning information in the n-th timer interruption process and a process for monitoring a set of winning information in the n + 1 timer interruption process. However, this indicates a state in which a game ball in which the occurrence of a winning is already detected is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the winning is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the winning information in the n-th timer interrupt processing is “0”, the winning of one game ball is treated as a plurality of winnings. I will not. Even in such a configuration, when a winning occurs, it is determined that a winning occurs when the timer interrupt process is executed twice, so the time required to determine that a winning has occurred is shortened. Is planned.

  In each timer interrupt process, a common logical operation is performed on a plurality of winning information acquired in the corresponding processing times to calculate a winning information monitoring result, and the calculation is performed for two consecutive processing times. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred from the result. As a result, by executing the same logical operation in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Here, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of winning is performed by storing winning information over a plurality of monitoring times as a history and performing a logical operation using the winning information of the stored history. On the other hand, regarding the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred, the determination is performed by counting the number of times that the power failure has been detected using a power failure detection counter. In this case, the period from the start of the process of step S401 regarding the determination of whether or not a prize has occurred until the process of step S508 is executed is the step from the start of the process of step S301 regarding the determination of whether or not a power outage has occurred. It is the same, substantially the same as or similar to the period until the processing of S308 is executed. This is because the number of times the content of the signal is monitored at the time of determination is greater in the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred than in the determination of whether or not a prize has occurred. Because the time is set.

  If a processing configuration that uses a forced wait time is applied to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred, the number of times that the signal can be monitored decreases, and the accuracy of grasping the occurrence of a power failure decreases. End up. On the other hand, in order to store a history of winning information when trying to apply a processing configuration that uses a large number of repeated checks rather than a forced wait time to determine whether or not a winning has occurred The required storage capacity will increase drastically. Therefore, each determination can be made appropriately by using the wait time for determining whether or not a prize has occurred and using the number of repetitions for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred.

<Timer update processing>
Next, the timer update process executed in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  For timer update processing, among the timer counters provided in the main RWM 94 for grasping the elapsed time to grasp the execution timing of the processing, the elapsed time is measured through subtraction of numerical information. The processes for subtracting the timer counters TC1 to TC10 are integrated.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer area TA set in the main RWM 94. As shown in FIG. 16, 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are used as subtraction-compatible timer counters TC1 to TC10. A plurality of types are provided, and a plurality of types of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are provided. The 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 include a special-purpose special electric timer counter TC1, which will be described later, a general-purpose ordinary electric timer counter TC2, which will be described later, a radio wave notification timer counter TC3, which will be described later, and a launch start timer counter TC4. include. The 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 include a monitoring timer counter TC5 described later, a disconnection notification timer counter TC6 described later, a short-circuit notification timer counter TC7 described later, and a disconnection confirmation timer counter TC8 described later. And are included.

  In each of the timer counters TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 10, address information for specifying the physical block allocated in the main side RWM 94 by the main side MPU 92 is set. Of the address information to be serial numbers, a series of address information is assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and a different series of address information is 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. Assigned to a group.

  Specifically, serial addresses from the leading edge address (P) to the address (Q-1) of the timer address are assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and from the address (Q). The serial addresses up to the address (R-1) are assigned to the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. That is, the address on the front side is assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 group, the last address in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 group, and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 group The first address is a sequential number.

  Also, since each address information is individually assigned to an area for 1 byte, one address information is assigned to each of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. Thus, two pieces of address information are assigned to each of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. In this case, when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are specified in the main MPU 92, the address information on the front side of the two address information assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is used. .

  In the timer update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S601, the head addresses of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are set in the timer address in the register of the main MPU 92. This head address is set on the program.

  In subsequent step S602, in order to specify the number of 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to be subject to update processing in the main MPU 92, the number of 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is set for the repetition counter. To do. In the subsequent step S603, a process of reading the numerical information stored in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 corresponding to the current timer address to the register of the main MPU 92 is executed. In step S603 immediately after the processing of step S601 and step S602 is executed, the numerical information stored in the 16-bit timer counter TC1 corresponding to the head address is read.

  In a succeeding step S604, it is determined whether or not the numerical information read in the step S603 is “0”. If it is not “0”, the numerical information is decremented by 1 in step S605, and the numerical information resulting from the subtraction is overwritten in the read 16-bit timer counter in step S606. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S607.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S604, the process proceeds to step S607 without executing the processes in steps S604 and S605. That is, when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to be updated are already “0”, the process of subtracting 1 is not executed.

  In step S607, the next 16-bit timer counter is set to be updated by adding 2 to the timer address. That is, as already described, since the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 have a 2-byte information amount and two pieces of address information are set, the address information is required to update the next 16-bit timer counter. 2 needs to be added. In subsequent step S608, 1 is subtracted from the repetition counter.

  Here, after the head address, the address of the target 16-bit timer counter is recognized by adding 2 to the timer address, so the head address of the addresses of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is recognized. Other than the above, it is not necessary to store them separately for timer update processing. Thereby, the storage capacity required in the main ROM 93 can be reduced. Further, all addresses except the head address are obtained by adding 2 to the current timer address. This simplifies the processing related to address recognition.

  Thereafter, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the repetition counter as a result of subtracting 1 in step S608 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the update process has been completed for all the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. If the repetition counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S609, and the processing of steps S603 to S606 is executed for the 16-bit timer counter corresponding to the timer address obtained by adding 2 in step S607. To do. If the repetition counter is “0”, it means that the update has been completed for all the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and thus the process proceeds to step S610.

  In step S610, the main MPU 92 specifies the number of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 to be updated, and sets the number of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 for the repetition counter. .

  Here, the process of step S610 is executed when the object of the update process is switched from the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. At this time, the 8-bit timer counter The start address of TC5 to TC10 is not set. This is because the timer address is set to the start address of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 in the process of step S607 when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 whose update order is the last are the update targets. Because. As a result, it is not necessary to individually store the head addresses of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 for the timer update process, so that the storage capacity required in the main ROM 93 can be reduced.

  In the subsequent step S611, a process of reading numerical information stored in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 corresponding to the current timer address to the register of the main MPU 92 is executed. In step S611 immediately after the processing of step S610 is executed, the numerical information stored in the 8-bit timer counter TC5 corresponding to the head address is read.

  In subsequent step S612, a process of subtracting 1 from the numerical information read in step S611 is executed, and then in step S613, the contents of the carry flag are added to the numerical information of the subtraction result. In step S614, the calculated numerical value information is overwritten on the read 8-bit timer counter.

  That is, when updating the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, it is different from the case of updating the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, whether or not the numerical information as in step S604 is “0”. The process of subtracting 1 from the numerical value information is executed without being performed. Therefore, when the process of subtracting 1 is executed when the numerical information is “0”, the 8-bit numerical information becomes “FF” in hexadecimal. On the other hand, if the numerical information becomes “FF” after the processing of step S612, “1” is set in the carry flag, and the numerical information of “1” is changed to “FF” in step S613. Is added to. Then, the numerical information returns to “0”.

  Here, in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, the processing load of the process of holding the numerical information of “0” to “0” even after subtracting 1 by using the carry flag is as follows. It is smaller than the processing load in the case of branching the process that proceeds by determining whether or not it is “0”. Therefore, in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, the processing load is reduced by using the carry flag as described above. On the other hand, in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, the number of bits handled for subtraction and addition of numerical information increases. Then, as described above, the processing load of the process of holding the numerical information of “0” at “0” after subtracting 1 by using the carry flag is “0” as in step S604. It becomes large compared with the processing load in the case of branching the processing that proceeds by determining whether or not. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the determination process as in step S604 for the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. That is, it is possible to appropriately handle the case where the numerical information to be updated is “0” in correspondence with each of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 and the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. It becomes.

  After execution of the process of step S614, the timer address is incremented by 1 in step S615 to set the next 8-bit timer counter as an update target, and the repeat counter is decremented by 1 in step S616.

  Here, with the above processing configuration, it is not necessary to store all of the addresses of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 individually for the timer update process. Thereby, the storage capacity required in the main ROM 93 can be reduced. In addition, after the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are updated, each address is grasped by adding 1 to the current timer address. This simplifies the processing related to address recognition.

  Thereafter, in step S617, it is determined whether or not the repetition counter as a result of subtracting 1 in step S616 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the update process has been completed for all the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. If the repeat counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S617, and the processing of steps S611 to S616 is executed for the 8-bit timer counter corresponding to the timer address obtained by subtracting 1 in step S616. To do. If the repeat counter is “0”, it means that the update has been completed for all of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, and thus this timer update process ends.

  As described above, the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 that are used to measure the passage of time by subtracting the numerical information are updated by the timer update process. (FIG. 17). As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the updating process of each of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is executed individually in each process to be used by the timer counters TC1 to TC10.

  For the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, the same update process (steps S604 to S606) can be used regardless of the counter by changing the timer address. Similarly, the 8-bit timer For the counters TC5 to TC10, the same update process (steps S612 to S614) can be used regardless of the counter by changing the timer address. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to collect and read out processing programs in comparison with a case where update processing of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is executed individually in each process that is a usage target of the timer counters TC1 to TC10. Become.

  Further, for example, in a configuration in which the numerical information of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is updated by an addition formula, whether or not each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is measuring a period is indicated by the numerical information of the timer counter TC1 to TC10. It is necessary to individually grasp the information by referring to information different from the above. On the other hand, in the timer update process, only the timer counters TC1 to TC10 for which the period is measured by subtracting the numerical information are to be updated, and the numerical information is less than “0”. The update process is executed so as not to be maintained. Thereby, in the configuration in which the updating of the numerical information of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is performed collectively, the process in a situation where the timer counters TC1 to TC10 do not measure the period is simplified.

  In addition, updating of a timer counter (specifically, a payout permission counter, which will be described later) in which a period is measured by updating numerical information using an addition formula is performed separately from the timer update process. As a result, it is possible to use the addition type timer counter while preventing the processing configuration of the timer update process from becoming complicated.

  In addition, the timer update process does not include a process whose processing time is likely to fluctuate relatively from the start timing in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), so the processing time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process varies. Even in this case, it is possible to reduce the influence of the fluctuation on the update timing of the timer counters TC1 to TC10. As a result, the timer counters TC1 to TC10 can be updated periodically.

<Injustice detection processing>
Next, the fraud detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the fraud detection process, whether or not a plurality of types of detection target frauds that are determined in advance has occurred is monitored, and if it is determined that fraud has occurred, a process for dealing with the fraud is executed. As an illegal act of such a plurality of types of detection targets, an act of illegally generating a winning game ball using a magnet, or an erroneous detection of a winning game ball by the large winning opening detection sensor 32e of the variable winning device 32. And an act of illegally generating a winning game ball using radio waves.

  In the fraud detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the magnet detection sensor 24a is ON. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 24a outputs a LOW level magnet detection signal corresponding to non-detection when the generation of magnetism by the magnet is not detected, and also detects the generation of magnetism by the magnet. In this case, a magnet detection signal of HI level corresponding to the detection is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The magnet detection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 92. In step S701, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the magnet detection sensor 24a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, the magnet detection counter provided in the main RWM 94 is cleared to “0” in step S702. The magnet detection counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 92 the number of times that the magnet detection sensor 24a has confirmed that the generation of magnetism is being detected.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S701, a process for adding 1 to the magnet detection counter is executed in step S703, and the numerical information after the addition is “2” in step S704. It is determined whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the main MPU 92 has confirmed that the magnet detection sensor 24a is detecting the occurrence of magnetism a plurality of times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S704, in step S705, a magnet detected state is set by setting "1" to the magnet detected flag of the main RWM 94. In subsequent step S706, the magnet detection command is set as an output target. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 92 has identified the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet. The command set as the output target in the main MPU 92 is transmitted to the output destination control device without executing any special processing in the processing on the program of the main MPU 92.

  The sound emission control device 72 periodically performs notification and effect control processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20 (for example, a cycle of 2 msec), and executes processing corresponding to reception of the magnet detection command in this processing. To do.

  That is, it is determined whether or not a magnet detection command is received as a notification system command in step S901. If a magnet detection command is received, a notification process corresponding to the magnet detection command is performed in step S902. Run. Specifically, a data table for making notification corresponding to the identification of the fraud using the magnet through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the read-out is performed. The error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 perform notification for magnet correspondence according to the data table.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later, control for launch permission described later, and control of notification for the first stage described later. Also, control of notification for illegal winning, control of notification for second stage described later, control of notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning described later, control of notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, And when the control of the notification for the occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is executed sequentially. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the magnet detection command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads out a data table from the ROM of the display control device 121 so that a notification corresponding to the identification of the fraud using the magnet is performed through the symbol display device 41, and the magnet according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 is made to provide a corresponding notification.

  Returning to the description of the fraud detection process (FIG. 18), after executing the process of step S706, the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet has been specified. The output setting for the external terminal board 81 is executed in the external information setting process (step S220) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The same applies to the processing relating to the following external output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S704 after execution of step S702, or after execution of step S707, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S708, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 by judging whether or not “1” is set in the big prize flag of the main RWM 94. . If a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RWM 94 is "4". The contents of the special figure special electricity counter will be described in detail later. When the counter is “4”, it means that the special winning opening 32a is open.

  When the special figure special electric counter is not “4”, that is, when the big prize opening 32a is closed, the game ball is detected by the big prize opening detection sensor 32e even though the big prize opening 32a is closed. It means that it was detected. In this case, the process proceeds to step S710, and the illegal winning state is set by setting “1” to the illegal winning flag of the main RWM 94. In a succeeding step S711, an illegal winning command is set as an output target. The illegal winning command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that an illegal act that erroneously detects the winning in the big winning opening detection sensor 32e has occurred.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not an unauthorized winning command is received as a notification-type command in step S <b> 901, and if an unauthorized winning command is received, step S <b> 902. The notification process corresponding to the illegal winning command is executed. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the illegal winning a prize to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the illegal winning prize is used according to the read data table. Is notified by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later, control for launch permission described later, and control of notification for the first stage described later. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for second stage described later, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning described later, control for notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, And when the control of the notification for the occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is executed sequentially. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the illegal winning command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads out a data table for making notification corresponding to the specification of the illegal winning a prize through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and responds to the illegal winning according to the read data table. Notification is performed by the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the fraud detection process (FIG. 18), after executing the process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act to be illegally won is specified. In step S709, a negative determination is made until the time required for detection of the game ball elapses from the closing timing in consideration of the case where a winning game ball is generated just before the closed big winning opening 32a is closed. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S708, an affirmative determination is made in step S709, or after execution of step S712, the radio wave detection process is executed in step S713, and then this fraud detection process is terminated.

  Here, the radio wave detection process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the radio wave detection process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the radio wave detection is in the first stage state. In the present embodiment, the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects the generation of radio waves, but only detecting the generation of radio waves does not stop the game, but only the notification, detects the generation of radio waves, and further activates the operation port. The game is stopped when winning to 33, 34 occurs. In this case, the state where only notification is performed is the first stage state of radio wave detection, and the state where the game is stopped is the second stage state of radio wave detection. Incidentally, the state where “1” is set in the first radio wave detection flag of the main RWM 94 is the first stage state of radio wave detection, and “1” is set in the second radio wave detection flag of the main RWM 94. The state is the second stage state of radio wave detection.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether the radio wave detection sensor 24b is ON. Specifically, the radio wave detection sensor 24b outputs a LOW level radio wave detection signal corresponding to non-detection when no radio wave is detected, and also supports HI during detection when radio wave is detected. A level radio wave detection signal is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The radio wave detection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the signal is set as an input target to the main MPU 92 by the driver IC. In step S802, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 24b is detecting radio waves.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the first radio wave detection flag of the main RWM 94 is set to “1” in step S803, thereby setting the first stage state of radio wave detection. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the first stage state of the radio wave detection is set when the radio wave detection sensor 24b is checked a plurality of times.

  In a succeeding step S804, the first stage command is set as an output target. The first step command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 92 has identified the first step of radio wave detection.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not the first stage command has been received in step S904, and if the first stage command has been received, in step S905. The notification duration is set. In this case, 30 seconds is set as the notification continuation period, and the lapse of the notification continuation period is measured using a timer counter or the like provided in the sound emission control device 72. Then, the sound emission control device 72 continues the notification corresponding to the reception of the first stage command until the notification duration period elapses. By the way, the notification continuation period is arbitrary as long as it is longer than the notification cycle set in step S805, but it continues for a time that allows the manager of the game hall to sufficiently confirm the notification for the first stage. It is preferable to set so as to.

  In a succeeding step S906, a sound emission pattern for the first stage is set. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the first stage state of radio wave detection to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and According to the read data table, notification for the first stage is performed by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later and control for launch permission described later. However, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage, which will be described later, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a-35b for winning, which will be described later, In the relationship between the notification control for occurrence of a short circuit and the control for notification of occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, the notification for the first stage is not prioritized. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S907, a command for the first stage corresponding to the reception of the first stage command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for making notification corresponding to the first stage state of the radio wave detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and performs the first according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the radio wave detection process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, numerical information corresponding to the time of the notification cycle (specifically 2000 msec) is set in the radio wave notification timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC3) provided in the main RWM 94. In the present embodiment, in the situation where the first stage state of the radio wave detection is continued, the first stage command is periodically transmitted so that the corresponding notification is continued. The radio wave notification timer counter is used by the main MPU 92 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the first stage command. The time of the notification cycle is arbitrary and may be 1000 msec.

  After that, in step S806, after executing the external output start processing for radio wave detection in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that it is in the first stage of radio wave detection, the process proceeds to step S807.

  In step S807, numerical information corresponding to the monitoring time (for example, 1000 msec) is set in the monitoring timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC5) provided in the main RWM 94. When a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 24b as described above, the first stage state of the radio wave detection is first set, and the second stage state of the radio wave detection is performed when a winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs. However, in the setting to the second stage state, the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 occurs during the detection of the radio wave or until the predetermined period elapses after the radio wave detection ends. It is done on condition that. The monitoring time set in step S807 corresponds to the predetermined period.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the first stage state of radio wave detection has already been set, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the state in which the radio wave detection sensor 24b is ON continues. . If it continues, it is determined in step S809 whether or not the radio wave notification timer counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S807. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S804. Thereby, when the first stage state of the radio wave detection continues, the first stage command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S808, the first stage state of radio wave detection is canceled by clearing the first radio wave detection flag of the main RWM 94 to “0” in step S810. In step S811, an external output canceling process for radio wave detection is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the first stage state of radio wave detection has been cancelled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, if the process of step S807 is executed, or if the process of step S811 is executed, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 by determining whether or not “1” is set in the operating winning flag of the main RWM 94. . In step S813, it is determined whether the numerical information of the monitoring timer counter is numerical information larger than “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S812 or step S813, the radio wave detection process is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in both step S812 and step S813, that is, when winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs during the detection of radio waves or until the monitoring time elapses after the detection of radio waves ends. Advances to processing of step S814 to step S816.

  In step S814, the second radio wave detection flag of the main RWM 94 is set to “1”, thereby setting the second stage state of radio wave detection. In the subsequent step S815, the second stage command is set as an output target. The second step command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the main MPU 92 has determined that it is in the second step of radio wave detection.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not the second stage command has been received in step S908, and if the second stage command has been received, in step S909. The sound emission pattern for the second stage is set. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the second stage state of radio wave detection to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and According to the read data table, notification for the second stage is performed by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59.

  Incidentally, the notification in this case is performed in a clearer or more flashy manner than the notification in the first stage state of the radio wave detection. In addition, the notification control is prioritized over the production control described later, the launch permission control described later, and the first-stage notification control. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to the detection sensors 31a to 35b described later, control for notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, and later described When the control of the notification for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S910, a command for the second stage corresponding to the reception of the second stage command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for making notification corresponding to the second stage state of the radio wave detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and performs the second operation according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the radio wave detection process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S815, the process proceeds to step S816. In step S816, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the radio wave detection is in the second stage state. Thereafter, the radio wave detection process is terminated.

<Game stop determination process>
Next, the game stop determination process executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game stop determination process, it is determined in step S1001 whether or not the magnet has been detected, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not it is an illegal winning state, and in step S1003, the second stage of radio wave detection. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. And when negative determination is carried out in all of step S1001-step S1003, this game stop determination process is complete | finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S1001 to S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, a process of setting all output states at the output port of the main MPU 92 to “0” is executed. Thus, for example, even when the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the variable prize driving unit 32c is stopped, so that the big prize opening 32a is switched to the closed state. It is done. Even when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is stopped, so that the electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state. . Further, even when the HI level launch permission signal is output from the main MPU 92 to the power source and launch control device 79, it is switched to the LOW level launch permission signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Is done.

  In the subsequent step S1005, the game stop state is set by setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the main RWM 94. In subsequent step S1006, other release processing is executed. For example, by outputting a game stop command to the payout side MPU 102, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 77 is stopped. In addition, the display of the variation of the pattern in the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 is stopped. Thereafter, the game stop determination process ends.

  By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S206 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, the processing in steps S207 to S221 is skipped. The processes in steps S207 to S221 are processes for substantially progressing the game, and the progress of the game can be stopped by skipping such processes.

  However, even in the game stop state, the power failure information storage process in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is not skipped. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs during the game stop state, it is possible to normally execute the power failure process. Assuming a configuration in which processing during a power failure is not normally executed while the game is stopped, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off when the game is stopped, the power failure flag is set and the checksum is calculated correctly. If this is not done, the main RWM 94 is initialized when the main process is started. If it does so, a game stop state will be cancelled | released through the simple power interruption of the pachinko machine 10. In such a case, for example, if the act of shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed after illegally generating a payout of the game ball, it becomes difficult to detect the fraud and the pachinko machine 10 is normally thereafter It becomes possible to repeat such cheating due to the operation. On the other hand, even if the game is stopped, the power failure process is normally executed. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off after performing the above fraudulent action, the game is stopped after the power is restored. It will return to a state and it will become possible to prevent generation | occurrence | production of the above inconveniences.

  As described above, the game stop state is not canceled even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. However, the main process (by manually operating the RWM erase switch provided in the power source and launch control device 79 and shutting off the power) The game stop flag is cleared to “0” and released through the process of step S108 in FIG. At this time, the state of performing external output regarding fraud detection is also released. In this case, since the power supply and launch control device 79 is provided on the backmost surface of the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to manually operate the RWM erase switch. Incidentally, in order to make the operability more difficult, a configuration may be adopted in which an RWM erasure switch is provided at a position covered from the back side by the back pack 73 or another member.

  Incidentally, even in the game stop state, the process of updating various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is continued without being skipped. Thereby, even if it is in a game stop state, the update of the counters C1-C4 for various lotteries, CINI, and CS can be continued. In this configuration, even if the RWM erase switch is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the various counters C1 to C4, CINI and CS are not initialized, and the game stop state is canceled. In this case, it is more effective when applied to a configuration in which the initialization of the main RWM 94 is not essential.

  As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of fraudulent acts subject to game suspension are set, the process for identifying the occurrence of each fraud in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) identifies whether or not such fraud has occurred. In particular, the specific game stop process is executed at a timing before the process for substantially advancing the game in the timer interrupt process. This makes it possible to consolidate the game stop processing into one process compared to the case of immediately executing the game stop processing when the occurrence of each fraud is identified, and simplification of the processing. Figured.

  Further, even when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified, the game stop process is not immediately executed. When the occurrence of the illegal action is specified, the notification is immediately executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can detect an illegal act at an early stage. In addition, because the abnormal external output is also performed immediately when the occurrence of fraud is specified, for example, if the external output is performed as management data stored in the management computer of the game hall, The administrator of the game hall can grasp the time at the moment when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified.

  Here, an act of generating a radio wave is included as an illegal act subject to the game stop, but the radio wave may be generated even in a situation where the illegal act is not performed. Therefore, in the radio wave detection process, a measure is taken to prevent a player who is playing a game from receiving disadvantages by executing the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Such countermeasures will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  22A shows the status of radio wave detection by the radio wave detection sensor 24b, FIG. 22B shows the monitoring status setting status, FIG. 22C shows the output status of commands from the main MPU 92, FIG. 22 (d) shows the winning status of game balls to the operation ports 33 and 34, and FIG. 22 (e) shows the setting status of the game stop state.

  First, detection of radio waves in the radio wave detection sensor 24b is started at timing t1. At this timing, notification corresponding to the start of detection of radio waves by the output of the first stage command is started, but the game stop state is not set. At the timing t1, the monitoring time is set and measurement of the monitoring time is started. By the way, this set of monitoring times is repeatedly executed while radio wave detection continues.

  After that, when the radio wave detection sensor 24b continues to detect the radio wave, the first stage command is output again when the notification period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2. The However, since the notification for the first stage of the radio wave detection is continued at this timing, the notification is continued as it is only by resetting the notification continuation time of the notification.

  Thereafter, the radio wave detection sensor 24b does not detect radio waves at the timing t3. However, even in this situation, the measurement of the monitoring time continues. In particular, as described above, the set monitoring time is repeatedly executed while radio wave detection continues, so the timing when the radio wave detection sensor 24b switches from the state in which the radio wave is detected to the state in which no radio wave is detected. The monitoring state is maintained for the monitoring time. That is, the time during which the monitoring state is substantially continued is the sum of the time during which the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects the radio wave and the monitoring time. Thereafter, the measurement of the monitoring time ends at the timing of t4.

  In the above situation, since the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has not occurred in the period during which the monitoring time is measured, that is, the period in the monitoring state, the notification for the first stage is performed. Although it is being executed, the game stop state is not set. Such a situation occurs when a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 24b due to noise or the like in the pachinko machine 10 or the game hall even though the player is playing a game normally. obtain. In this case, since the game is not stopped, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from being disadvantaged while alerting the manager of the game hall.

  On the other hand, a case where an illegal act using radio waves is performed will be described. First, detection of radio waves in the radio wave detection sensor 24b is started at a timing t5. At this timing, the output of the first stage command and the measurement of the monitoring time are started as already described, but the game stop state is not set.

  Thereafter, during the period in which the monitoring time is being measured, that is, at the timing of t6 during the monitoring state, a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. In this case, first, a second stage command is output at the timing of t6, and notification for the second stage of radio wave detection is started. In addition, with respect to the processing time of the timer interruption process at the timing of t6, the game stop state is set at the timing of t7 when the next processing time is started, and the progress of the game becomes impossible. At this time, the measurement of the monitoring time is ended.

  Even if the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects a radio wave as described above, the upper operation port 33 or the measurement time of the monitoring time started in association with the detection is not performed without immediately setting the game stop state. By setting the game stop state in response to the winning of the lower operating port 34, an illegal radio wave is output without causing any disadvantage to the legitimate player as described above. If an act of erroneously detecting a winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed, it is possible to stop the progress of the game thereafter.

  In particular, fraudulent acts utilizing radio waves are performed for the purpose of causing false detection of winnings in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is easy to determine that a winning has occurred in the operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. On the other hand, in a situation where a game is being played regularly, there is a low possibility that detection of radio waves and winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 will occur at the same time. Under such circumstances, by detecting the radio wave and setting the game stop state on condition that a winning is made to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the radio wave is transmitted so that the fraudulent person can cheat. If it occurs, it can be dealt with through the setting to the game stop state, and the possibility that the game stop state will be set when radio waves are generated in the state where the game is being played is reduced. The

  In addition, the monitoring state set when the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects the radio wave is not limited to the period in which the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects the radio wave, but the monitoring time has elapsed after the elapse of that period. Continue until Thereby, even if a predetermined time lag occurs after it is determined that a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has occurred in the main side MPU 92 after stopping the output of unauthorized radio waves, It becomes possible to deal with such fraud.

  Further, in the configuration in which the game stop state is not set only by detecting a radio wave as described above, when a radio wave is detected, a notification is made. As a result, when radio waves are detected, it is possible to prompt the game hall administrator to deal with it by first giving a notification. In addition, by first executing a mild procedure of performing notification and then executing a severe procedure of stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to take steps to deal with the generation of radio waves in a step-by-step manner. It is possible to appropriately deal with the occurrence, and to reduce the influence on the regular player by the configuration for taking such a countermeasure.

  In order to make it difficult to set the game stop state through the detection of radio waves in the pachinko machine 10 of the player who is playing a game, for example, the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 in the monitoring state. When the winning is continuously generated over the reference number set as a plurality of times, or the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 during the monitoring state is set as a period longer than at least the monitoring period. The game stop state may be set when the reference number set as a plurality of times is generated during the predetermined period.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when the period which has detected the radio wave continuously or intermittently exceeds a predetermined reference period.

<Launch control process>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S212 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the launch control process, a game ball is launched to the power supply and launch control device 79 on the condition that the HI level condition fulfillment signal is received from the transmission circuit 116 that fulfills the condition in the power supply and launch control device 79. This is a process for permitting.

  In the launch control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the condition has been satisfied. The condition fulfillment received state means a state in which the main MPU 92 has already identified that the HI level condition fulfillment signal has already been received. Is set. If the condition has not been received yet, it is determined in step S1102 whether the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the condition satisfaction signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 92. In step S1102, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the main firing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, in step S1103, the condition satisfaction received flag is set in the main RWM 94 to set the condition satisfaction received state.

  In a succeeding step S1104, a delay time lottery process is executed. In the delay time lottery process, when the main MPU 92 starts receiving the HI level condition establishment signal, the lottery process determines the timing for starting the transmission of the HI level firing permission signal by lottery. is there.

  Specifically, the main RWM 94 is provided with a delay lottery counter that is updated so that 1 is added every time the timer interrupt process is started. In step S1104, first, the current numerical information of the counter is provided. Is read. Then, the read numerical information is collated with a delay lottery table provided in the main ROM 93, and the numerical information of the delay time corresponding to the numerical information is read.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the delay time is 0 sec, 0.6 sec which is a firing cycle when game balls are continuously fired, a time twice as long as the launch cycle, and 3 times the launch cycle. A plurality of types of delay times are set, such as double the time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type with a delay time longer than 0 sec is set. In step S1104, a lottery for determining whether to set the delay time may be executed. Good.

  The delay time may be set longer than the above time. However, in the case where the big prize opening 32a is opened at a high frequency time, the player who knows that the opening has been started has started the operation of the firing handle 55 at that timing, but the big prize opening 32a has been opened. In order to prevent the large winning opening 32a from being closed without generating a prize, it is preferable that the delay time is set to be shorter than the high frequency time. More preferably, the delay time is set so that a high-frequency number of winnings can occur even when the operation of the firing handle 55 is started at the timing when the opening of the big winning opening 32a is started by the high-frequency time. It should be set. Further, the delay time may not be set during the opening / closing execution mode or when the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  In subsequent step S1105, numerical information corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S1104 is set in a firing start timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC4) provided in the main RWM 94. Then, this launch control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the condition has been satisfied, it is determined in step S1106 whether the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. If the condition establishment signal is at the HI level, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the firing is permitted. The firing permitted state means a state in which a HI level firing permission signal has already been output, and is a state in which “1” is set in the firing permitted flag in the main RWM 94. If it is in the firing permitted state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, and the present firing control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not in the firing permitted state, a negative determination is made in step S1107, and the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the firing start timer counter in the main RWM 94 is “0”. If it is “0”, the main firing control process is terminated as it is. If it is not “0”, the processing of step S1109 to step S1111 is executed.

  In step S1109, the launch permitted state is set by setting “1” to the launch permitted flag of the main RWM 94. In subsequent step S1110, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the HI level. As a result, the power supply and launch control device 79 is allowed to launch a game ball. Thereafter, in step S1111, the launch permission command is set as an output target, and then the launch control process is terminated.

  The launch permission command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main side MPU 92 has newly permitted the launch of a game ball.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a launch permission command is received in step S911. If the launch permission command is received, the launching command is launched in step S912. Set the sound emission pattern for permission. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the launch permission to be performed through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the launch is permitted according to the read data table. Corresponding notification is performed by the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59.

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over control for effects described later. However, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal prizes, control for notification for the first stage relating to radio wave detection, control for notification for the second stage, and the detection sensors 31a to 35b for prizes described later. In relation to the control of notification for occurrence of disconnection, the control of notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, and the control of notification for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side described later, notification corresponding to launch permission is not prioritized. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In subsequent step S913, a command for permission to fire corresponding to reception of the permission command for firing is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for enabling notification corresponding to the launch permission through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and notifies the launch permission notification according to the read data table. This is performed by the display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the launch control process (FIG. 23), if a negative determination is made in step S1106, the condition is satisfied by clearing the received flag indicating that the condition is satisfied in the main RWM 94 in step S1112. In step S1113, the emission permitted state is canceled by clearing the emission permitted flag in the main RWM 94 to “0”. In the subsequent step S1114, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Then, this launch control process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the firing control process in the main MPU 92, the main MPU 92 can grasp whether or not the firing solenoid 54 of the game ball launching mechanism 51 is being driven. Through this understanding, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device can be notified that the launch is permitted at the timing when the launch of the game ball is permitted. By executing such notification, for example, when the player adjusts the timing of game ball firing by measuring the timing at which a winning is likely to occur, the pachinko machine 10 itself can notify that fact. It becomes possible, and in a game hall or the like where such an action is desired to be suppressed, the action can be stopped through the notification.

  Incidentally, the notification configuration as described above has an opening / closing door that opens and closes the entrance, and has an advantageous opening in the internal space that is opened to the gaming area through the entrance, and winning of the gaming ball to the advantageous entrance This is more effective when applied to a configuration in which a bonus such as a big hit state is given to a player. For example, when a predetermined opening / closing condition is satisfied, in the case where the opening / closing door is configured to be opened at a predetermined timing or a plurality of times at a predetermined cycle, a game ball is launched aiming at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened. Action is assumed. In this case, if such a hit is made, the game hall may receive an unforeseen disadvantage. Under such circumstances, the occurrence of the disadvantage can be suppressed by performing notification corresponding to the above-described launch permission.

  In addition, when reception of the HI level condition establishment signal is started, the delay time lottery is performed in step S1104, and after the delay time corresponding to the lottery result has elapsed, the launch permission signal is switched to the HI level. is there. Also from this point, the above-mentioned aiming can be suppressed. That is, even if the player operates the firing handle 55 at a predetermined timing to aim at a target, the timing at which the game ball is actually launched fluctuates irregularly. It is suppressed.

<Input status monitoring process>
Next, the input state monitoring process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the input status monitoring process, based on the signal received from the winning IC 95, the main MPU 92 determines whether or not a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred at each winning detection sensor 31a to 35b itself or in the middle of the electrical path. Execute the process for grasping.

  Here, the function of the winning IC 95 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a block diagram for explaining a configuration related to the electrical connection between the big winning opening detection sensor 32e and the winning IC 95 among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the signal input to IC95 for winning. Of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, those other than the big winning opening detection sensor 32e are the same as those in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 24A, a voltage of 12V is applied to the special winning opening detection sensor 32e through the electric path EL1 for input. The electrical path EL1 is connected to the power-on power supply unit 113 via the main control board 91. Further, the special winning opening detection sensor 32e is connected to the winning IC 95 through the electrical path EL2 for output, and a voltage corresponding to the detection result in the special winning opening detection sensor 32e is applied to the winning IC 95. In this case, a plurality of resistors R1 and R2 are connected to the electrical path EL2 for output, and the voltage applied to the winning IC 95 by these resistors R1 and R2 is supplied to a predetermined value or less. The function of reducing the current to a predetermined value or less is fulfilled.

  An electrical signal as shown in FIG. 24B is input to the winning IC 95 in accordance with whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection unit of the special winning opening detection sensor 32e. In FIG. 24B, a signal after shaping into a simple waveform is shown for easy understanding. In this case, a low level electric signal is input to the winning IC 95 when the game ball does not pass through the detection unit of the big winning opening detection sensor 32e, and a high level electric signal when the game ball passes through the detection unit. Is input to the winning IC 95. When such a LOW level or HI level signal is input, the winning IC 95 outputs a corresponding signal to the main MPU 92 as a winning signal.

  On the other hand, when a disconnection occurs in each of the electrical paths EL1, EL2 or inside the sensor for the winning prize detection sensor 32e, the voltage input from the winning prize detection sensor 32e to the winning IC 95 is LOW level. Vmin (that is, 0 V), which is a lower voltage. Further, when a short circuit occurs between the electric paths EL1 and EL2 or inside the sensor, the voltage input to the winning IC 95 from the big winning opening detection sensor 32e is higher than VHI when Vmax. It becomes.

  The winning IC 95 outputs a disconnection signal and a short circuit signal to the main MPU 92 separately from the winning signal with respect to the winning prize detection sensor 32e, and the voltage applied from the winning prize detection sensor 32e becomes Vmin. In this case, the disconnection signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the voltage applied from the special winning opening detection sensor 32e becomes Vmax, the short circuit signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. The main side MPU 92 recognizes that the disconnection or the short circuit has occurred in the special winning opening detection sensor 32e by confirming the switching to the HI level, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  In the input state monitoring process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, it is first determined in step S1201 whether or not a disconnection has occurred. The disconnection occurrence state means a state in which the main side MPU 92 has already identified that the HI level disconnection signal has already been received. In this state, the disconnection occurrence flag in the main side RWM 94 is set to “1”. is there. If it is not a disconnection occurrence state, it is determined in step S1202 whether any disconnection signal is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the disconnection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 92. In step S1202, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the disconnection signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds directly to step S1211. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, a disconnection occurrence state is set by setting “1” in the disconnection occurrence flag of the main RWM 94 in step S1203. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to a disconnection generation | occurrence | production state, when confirming that a disconnection signal is HI level in multiple times.

  In subsequent step S1204, the disconnection generation command is set as an output target. The disconnection generation command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the main MPU 92 has specified the occurrence of disconnection in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. In this case, the main MPU 92 can identify the target winning detection sensors 31a to 35b whose disconnection signal is at the HI level, and the disconnection occurrence command includes the target sensor. Contains type information. Incidentally, when disconnection occurs in the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, types of information about all of the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are included.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a disconnection occurrence command is received as a notification-type command in step S901. If the disconnection occurrence command is received, step S902 is performed. Then, a notification process corresponding to the disconnection occurrence command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and for disconnection generation according to the read data table. Is notified by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59. Such a data table corresponds to 30 sec, but the time is arbitrary. In addition, the notification for occurrence of disconnection is performed in the same manner regardless of the type of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of occurrence of disconnection, but may be configured in a manner according to the type. .

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over the control for effects described later, the control for launching permission, and the control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal prizes, control for notification for the second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for short circuit generation described later, and for generation of disconnection on the payout side described later When the notification control overlaps with the timing, the notification control with the timing overlap is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S903, a disconnection command corresponding to reception of the disconnection occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 grasps the fact that the disconnection has occurred from the command and the types of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the disconnection, and notifies the occurrence of the disconnection corresponding to the type through the symbol display device 41. A data table to be performed is read from the ROM of the display control device 121, and a notification for occurrence of disconnection is performed on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the input state monitoring process (FIG. 25), after executing the process of step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, numerical information corresponding to the time of the notification cycle (for example, 1000 msec) is set in the disconnection notification timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC6) provided in the main RWM 94. In this embodiment, in a situation where the disconnection occurrence state continues, the disconnection occurrence command is periodically transmitted so that the corresponding notification is continued, and the disconnection notification timer counter Is used by the main MPU 92 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the disconnection occurrence command. Thereafter, in step S1206, an external output start process for disconnection detection is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the disconnection has occurred, and then the process proceeds to step S1211.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the disconnection occurrence state has already been set, it is determined in step S1207 whether any disconnection signal is at the HI level. If it is at the HI level, it is determined in step S1208 whether or not the disconnection notification timer counter is "0". If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1211. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1204. Thereby, when the disconnection occurrence state continues, the disconnection occurrence command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1207, the disconnection occurrence state is canceled by clearing the disconnection occurrence flag of the main RWM 94 to “0” in step S1209. In step S1210, an external output canceling process for disconnection detection is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the disconnection occurrence state has been cancelled. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211, it is determined whether or not a short circuit has occurred. The short circuit occurrence state means a state in which the main side MPU 92 has already identified that the HI level short circuit signal has already been received, and is a state in which “1” is set in the short circuit occurrence flag in the main side RWM 94. is there. If it is not a short-circuit occurrence state, it is determined in step S1212 whether any of the short-circuit signals is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the short-circuit signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 92. In step S1212, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether the short circuit signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the process directly proceeds to step S1221. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, a short-circuit occurrence state is set by setting “1” in the short-circuit occurrence flag of the main RWM 94 in step S1213. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to a short circuit occurrence state, when confirming that a short circuit signal is HI level in multiple times.

  In the subsequent step S1214, the short-circuit occurrence command is set as an output target. The short-circuit generation command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main-side MPU 92 has identified the occurrence of a short-circuit in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. In this case, the main MPU 92 can identify the target winning detection sensors 31a to 35b whose short circuit signal is at the HI level, and the short circuit occurrence command includes the sensor of the target sensor. Contains type information. Incidentally, when a short circuit occurs in the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, information of types of all of the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is included.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a short-circuit occurrence command is received as a notification-type command in step S901. If the short-circuit occurrence command is received, step S902 is performed. Then, a notification process corresponding to the short-circuit occurrence command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the occurrence of the short circuit to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and for short circuit occurrence according to the read data table. Is notified by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59. Such a data table corresponds to 30 sec, but the time is arbitrary. Moreover, although the notification for the occurrence of the short circuit is performed in the same manner regardless of the type of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the occurrence of the short circuit, the notification may be performed in a mode according to the type. .

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over the control for effects described later, the control for launching permission, and the control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning, and later In the case where the timing and the notification control for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side overlap, the control of each notification in which the timing overlaps is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S903, a short-circuit command corresponding to reception of the short-circuit occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 grasps the fact that a short circuit has occurred from the command and the types of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the short circuit, and notifies the occurrence of a short circuit corresponding to the type through the symbol display device 41. A data table to be executed is read from the ROM of the display control device 121, and the symbol display device 41 is notified of the occurrence of a short circuit according to the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the input state monitoring process (FIG. 25), after executing the process of step S1214, the process proceeds to step S1215. In step S1215, numerical information corresponding to the time (for example, 1000 msec) of the notification cycle is set in the short-circuit notification timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC7) provided in the main RWM 94. In the present embodiment, in order to continue the notification corresponding to the situation where the short-circuit occurrence state continues, the short-circuit occurrence command is periodically transmitted. Is used by the main MPU 92 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the short-circuit occurrence command. Thereafter, in step S1216, an external output start process for short circuit detection is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that a short circuit has occurred, and then the process proceeds to step S1221.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1211 that the short-circuit occurrence state has already been set, it is determined in step S1217 whether any one of the short-circuit signals is at the HI level. If it is at the HI level, it is determined in step S1218 whether or not the short-circuit notification timer counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1221. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1214. Thereby, when the short circuit occurrence state continues, the short circuit occurrence command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the short-circuit occurrence state is canceled by clearing the short-circuit occurrence flag of the main RWM 94 to “0” in step S1219. In step S1220, an external output canceling process for detecting a short circuit is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the short-circuit occurrence state has been cancelled. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1221.

  In step S1221, other processing is executed. In other processes, it is ascertained whether or not the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are being opened. If the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are being opened, a notification to that effect is given by the display lamp unit 58a, the speaker unit 59 and the symbol display device 41. A command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 which is a sub-side control device so that it is executed by at least one of the above. After executing the process of step S1221, the input state monitoring process is terminated.

  As described above, when the input state monitoring process is executed, when a disconnection or a short circuit occurs in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, a notification thereof is executed. This prevents a state in which a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred from being left unattended.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S1201-step S1220 is separately performed with respect to each winning detection sensor 31a-35b. Further, the winning IC 95 may not be provided, and the processing in steps S1201 to S1220 may not be executed.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and when the holding information is stored, the holding is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not the information is correct, and further, a process for performing an effect for game times is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the special figure special power control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, first, in step S1301, a hold information acquisition process is executed. Here, the holding information acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the operation winning flag of the main RWM 94. It is determined whether or not a prize is generated for the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. Here, as already described, since a plurality of operation winning flags are provided, it is determined in step S1401 whether or not “1” is set in any of the plurality of operating winning flags. To do.

  If “1” is not set in any of the operation winning flags, the acquisition process is terminated as it is. If “1” is set in any of the operation winning flags, a process of clearing the operation winning flag “0” is executed in step S1402. In this case, when “1” is set only for one operation winning flag, the operation winning flag is cleared to “0”, and when “1” is set for a plurality of operating winning flags, Clear one operation winning flag of “0”.

  In the subsequent step S1403, the number N of storages stored in the storage number storage area NA in the storage area 94b is read, and it is determined whether or not the number N is less than the upper limit (“4” in the present embodiment). To do. If the hold number N is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1406. If the number of holds N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1404, and 1 is added to the number N of holds.

  In the subsequent step S1405, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 is used as the first reserved area among the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. That is, it is stored in the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number N incremented by 1 in step S1404. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in another operation winning flag. If there is an operation winning flag for which “1” is set, the processing from step S1402 to step S1405 is repeated. If there is no operation winning flag for which “1” is set, the acquisition process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, a process of reading information of a special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RWM 94 is executed. In a succeeding step S1303, processing for reading the special figure special power address table from the main ROM 93 is executed. In step S1304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to information on the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, processing contents of steps S1302 to S1304 will be described.

  As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process that is a process for starting the effect for game times and a process for changing the effect for the game times are processed. A middle process and a special figure finalizing process which is a process for ending the effect for game times are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a special electricity opening process which is a process for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 32a The special electricity closing process, which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 32a, and the special electricity termination, which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Processing is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main side MPU 92 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  The special figure special power address table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 28. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”. Start address information ("SA0" to "SA6") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information of the counter. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determining process, the start address SA3 is the program start address for executing the special electricity start process, and the start address SA4 is executing the special electricity release process The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end process. .

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 92 to grasp which process is to be executed as special figure special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, an effect for game times starts when no other game times effect is executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode. In the process related to the effect, before starting the effect for the game turn, whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game turn is being executed is set, and the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. It is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that is set. In addition, during the execution of the game-turn effect, a flag indicating that the flag indicating that the game-turn effect is being executed is set and a confirmation display is set. It is necessary to check whether or not

  In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other opening / closing execution modes are not executed. In the process, before starting the opening / closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for playing the game has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it is being performed. Further, when the opening is being performed, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the special winning opening 32a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not. Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

  On the other hand, if a special figure special electricity counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  Below, using the special figure special electricity counter and special figure special electricity address table, special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing, special figure confirmation processing, special electricity start processing, special electricity opening processing, special electricity closing processing, and A processing configuration for executing the special electricity ending process will be described, and a processing configuration of each processing will be specifically described.

  After executing the process of step S1304, a zero flag setting process is executed in step S1305. In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special figure special power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC1) is read, and when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, it is provided in the register of the main MPU 92. The process of setting “1” to the zero flag is executed. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter that is used for the main MPU 92 to specify the update timing of the special figure special electricity counter according to the passage of time.

  In subsequent step S1306, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1304 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S1307. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S1308. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S1309. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S1310. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S1311. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S1312, and if the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S1313. When the processes of steps S1307 to S1313 are executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the processing in steps S1307 to S1313 will be described individually.

  First, the special figure variation start process of step S1307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the holding number N is 1 or more. If the number of holds N is “0”, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. If the number N of holds is 1 or more, a data setting process is executed in step S1502.

  In the data setting process, first, the hold number N is decremented by 1, and the data (that is, hold information) stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a configuration may be adopted in which a shift command for causing the voice light emission control device 72 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S1503, an appropriate / bad determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 93, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information related to the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 93. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In subsequent step S1504, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S1503 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S1505. In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 93, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information relating to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, the low winning / high winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result is specified.

  In a succeeding step S1506, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 93 in advance. Then, the specified information is stored in the main RWM 94. In the jackpot result stop result table, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S1507, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RWM 94 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result. In step S1507, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S1505 is displayed. “1” is set for the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1504 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S1508. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game turn related to the start of the current change is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the main ROM 93 in advance. Then, the specified information is stored in the main RWM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes in step S1507 and step S1508, in step S1509, a process for grasping the display duration (display duration) is executed. In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result. If the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the main ROM 93. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration time corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is referred to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the main ROM 93. Get information. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number N of holds is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of holds N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a display duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  In subsequent step S1510, the information on the display continuation time acquired in step S1509 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 17) already described. By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 43 and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when these variation displays are ended, In a state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the symbol is finally displayed (final stop display) over a fixed time (final stop time). In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S1509 is a time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display continuation time can be rephrased as a time before confirmation (time before final stop).

  In the subsequent step S1511, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on whether or not reach has occurred is not included in the command for use, the audio light emission control device 72 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the display duration time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on the low probability big hit result, information on the low winning high hit big hit result, and information on the most advantageous big hit result as game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step S1511 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 which is a sub-side control device.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command are received as a production command in step S <b> 914, and receives the variation command and the type command. If YES in step S915, processing for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the change command and type command is executed in step S915. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the current game time to be performed through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the game is performed according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform a rendition effect. Such a data table corresponds to the display duration of the current game time.

  In the subsequent step S916, an effect command corresponding to the current variation command and type command is transmitted to the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, the type of effect for the current game round is grasped from the command, and a data table for causing the display effect corresponding to the type to be performed through the symbol display device 41 is displayed in the display control device 121. The design is read from the ROM, and the game display effect is performed by the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 29), after the process of step S1511 is executed, the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 is started in step S1512. In subsequent step S1513, the special figure special electric power counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1” when the process of step S1513 is executed. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure changing process in step S1308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the display continuation time in the current game round effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92. To do. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the display duration time in the current game round effect is It means that it has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the main display unit 43 or not. If it is not the update timing, the special figure changing process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, update content reading processing is executed in step S1603. Such update contents are stored in the main ROM 93 as an update data table. In step S1603, the update contents corresponding to the update timing are read from the data table.

  In the subsequent step S1604, the update content read in step S1603 is set for updating the main display unit 43. Incidentally, the process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is executed in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1601, a confirmation command (final stop display command) is set as an output target in step S1605. The confirmation command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game round effect.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a confirmation command is received as an effect command in step S914. If the confirmation command is received, the process proceeds to step S915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the confirmation command is executed. Specifically, a data table for performing an effect corresponding to the confirmation display through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and for the confirmation display according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform the above-described effects. Such a data table corresponds to a fixed time.

  In the subsequent step S916, an effect-type command corresponding to the confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 121. In the display control device 121, a data table for confirming display from the command through the symbol display device 41 is read from the ROM of the display control device 121, and the present game round effect is performed according to the read data table. Display the stop result.

  Returning to the description of the special figure changing process (FIG. 30), after executing the process of step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, a stop result reading process is executed. In the reading process, information about the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed set in the main RWM 94 in step S1506 or step S1508 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 29) at the start of the current game round is read. In subsequent step S1607, the read pattern information is set for updating the main display unit 43.

  In the subsequent step S1608, information on a fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in the main ROM 93 in advance is read, and the information on the fixed time is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter. In the subsequent step S1609, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “1” when the special figure changing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “2” when the process of step S1609 is executed. " Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure determination process in step S1309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not a fixed time has elapsed in the current game round effect by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92. . That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “2” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the fixed time in the current game play effect has elapsed Means that If a negative determination is made in step S1701, the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the flags corresponding to the jackpot result in the main RWM 94, so that the result of the hit determination that triggered the current game round is the jackpot result. It is determined whether or not (i.e., a result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the opening command is set as an output target in step S1703. The opening command is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Incidentally, the opening command also includes information on the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not an opening command has been received as an effect command in step S914, and if an opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the opening command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode to be performed through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and opening / closing is executed according to the read data table. The effect for the mode is performed by the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59. Incidentally, the data table selected here differs according to the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the subsequent step S916, an effect command corresponding to the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for performing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode from the command through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and executes the current opening / closing execution according to the read data table. An effect for the mode is executed by the symbol display device 41. Incidentally, the data table selected here differs according to the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Returning to the description of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 31), after executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 93 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In the subsequent step S1705, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”. Therefore, when the process of step S1705 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “3”. " Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if the result of the success / failure determination that triggered the current game round is an outlier result (that is, a result that does not trigger the opening / closing execution mode), The process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the numerical value information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity start process of step S1310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the opening time in this opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. Means. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this special electricity start process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, “15” is set in the round counter provided in the main RWM 94 in step S1802, and the winning counter provided in the main RWM 94 is set in step S1803. Set “9”. The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode, and the winning counter determines whether or not the upper limit number of game balls has been won in one round game. Is a counter for specifying the main MPU 92.

  In a succeeding step S1804, a reading process of the first opening continuation time is executed. Specifically, by checking the flag of the main RWM 94, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low winning high-precision winning result, and the low winning high-precision winning result is determined. If not, information on the open duration corresponding to the long-time mode is read from the main ROM 93. On the other hand, in the case of a low winning high probability winning result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short time mode is read from the main ROM 93. Then, in step S1805, the read release duration information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter.

  In the subsequent step S1806, an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 32a is executed. In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 32 a in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started so as to switch the special winning opening 32a to the open state.

  In subsequent step S1807, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power start process is executed is “3”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step S1807 is executed. Become. Thereafter, the special electricity start process is terminated.

  Next, the special power open process in step S1311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the open duration in the current round game has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, the round counter is decremented by 1. In subsequent step S1903, information on the closing time (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 93 is read, and the information on the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In step S1904, a closing setting process for closing the special winning opening 32a is executed. In the closing setting process, “0” is set in the register related to the big winning opening 32a in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is stopped so as to switch the special winning opening 32a to the closed state.

  In the subsequent step S1905, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter when the process of step S1905 is executed is “5”. Become. Thereafter, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not “1” is set in the big winning flag of the main RWM 94. If it is not set, the special electric power release opening process is terminated. If it is set, the big prize flag is cleared to “0” in step S1907, and the prize counter is decremented by 1 in step S1908. Thereafter, in step S1909, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is “0”. If the winning counter is “0”, the processing in steps S1902 to S1905 is executed, and then the special electric power releasing process is terminated. If it is not “0”, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity closing process in step S1312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If the round counter is not “0”, whether or not the closing time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92 in step S2002. Determine whether or not. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the closing time has elapsed. When a negative determination is made in step S2002, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, "9" is set to the winning counter in step S2003. In a succeeding step S2004, a reading process of the opening continuation time is executed. Specifically, by executing processing similar to the processing in step S1804 of the special power start processing (FIG. 32), information on the opening duration corresponding to the long-time mode or information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-time mode. Is read. In step S2005, the read release duration information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter.

  In the subsequent step S2006, an opening setting process is executed. The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step S1806 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 32). In subsequent step S2007, 1 is subtracted from the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step S2007 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the round counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the ending command is set as an output target. The ending command is a command for recognizing that it is time to start the effect for ending with respect to the sound emission control device 72 which is the control device on the sub side. Incidentally, the ending command also includes information on the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not an ending command has been received as a production command in step S914. If the ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the ending command is executed. Specifically, a data table for performing an effect corresponding to the ending through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and the effect for ending is read according to the read data table. Is performed by the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59. Incidentally, the data table selected here corresponds to the ending time.

  In a succeeding step S916, an effect command corresponding to the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for causing an ending effect from the command to be performed through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and displays the ending effect according to the read data table. It is executed by the display device 41. Incidentally, the data table selected here corresponds to the ending time.

  Returning to the description of the special electric power closing process (FIG. 34), after executing the process of step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 93 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In the subsequent step S2010, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “6” when the process of step S2010 is executed. " Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity ending process in step S1313 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 92. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), in step S1305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the ending time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the special electricity ending process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, game state transition processing is executed in step S2102. In the game state transition process, the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that was completed this time is confirmed by referring to the flag of the main RWM 94, and the lottery mode corresponding to the confirmed type of jackpot result And set to support mode. Note that the flag indicating information corresponding to the type of jackpot result in the processing is cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S2103, the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the special electricity ending process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure special power control process is executed using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter. When the main MPU 92 identifies the situation in a series of game flows, it is only necessary to refer to a special figure special electricity counter, and it is necessary to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing as in the past. There is no. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, in each process of step S1307 to step S1313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for causing the transition to the next situation after the completion of the one situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, “0”, which is the initial value of the special figure special electricity counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of gaming situations composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Thus, even after the initialization of the main-side RWM 94, the first situation in the series of gaming situations can be achieved without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter.

  In addition, when updating the special figure special power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  In addition, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above-described series of game situations is set separately from the processes in steps S1307 to S1313, and refer to the special figure special electricity counter. Are not included in each process executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the setting of the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information is simplified.

  Of the processes in steps S1307 to S1313, in a process in which a period is measured in order to determine an end condition of a corresponding situation, a period measurement unit such as a special figure special timer counter is used. Measurement is performed. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main RWM 94 can be reduced. In addition, since the situation corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter does not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referred to in a plurality of situations. In other words, the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

  Further, the process of updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed by a timer update process (FIG. 17) set as a process different from steps S1307 to S1313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps S1307 to S1313.

  Also, whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” is confirmed collectively in step S1305 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 26). In each process of step S1308 to step S1313, The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 92. Thereby, in each process of step S1308-step S1313, compared with the case where numerical information is read from the special figure special electricity timer counter of the main | side RWM94 and it is determined whether the numerical information is "0", The processing configuration can be simplified.

  Here, the special power special figure counter is also referred to in order to confirm which state is in a series of games composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode in processes other than the special figure special electric control processing. The As such other processing, the fraud detection processing (FIG. 18) already described exists, and in the fraud detection processing, it is confirmed in step S709 whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “4”. It is confirmed whether or not the big prize opening 32a is open. In addition to this, there is a demonstration display process executed in step S217 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

<Demo display process>
The demonstration display process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “0”. The case where the special figure special electricity counter is “0” means that the game round effect has not been executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag that there is a game-playing effect as in the prior art, and the presence / absence of the flag is confirmed by the presence / absence of the flag, It is necessary to read the flag information from the main RWM 94 and check the information, and then read the other flag information from the main RWM 94 to check the information. Then, it is necessary to perform address designation to the main RWM 94 at least twice, and to perform data setting processing for the register when data is transferred to the RWM 94 at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electricity counter, the address designation to the main RWM 94 is only required once, and further, the data setting process to the register when data is transferred is only once. . Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the special figure special power counter is not "0", the present demonstration display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric power counter is "0", step S2201 is executed. The process proceeds to S2202. In step S2202, it is determined whether or not a demo display state is set.

  The demo display state means a state in which a demo display (that is, a standby display) has already been performed on the symbol display device 41, and “1” is set in the demo display flag of the main MPU 92. is there. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo waiting time (for example, after the ending of the previous opening / closing execution mode is ended after displaying the stop result of the previous game times and ending the final opening / closing execution mode) 0.1 sec), an image of the start waiting effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform an effect corresponding thereto. .

  By the way, in the demo display in the symbol display device 41, an image in which the symbol displayed on the active line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying an image in which an operation is being performed.

  If it is determined in step S2202 that the display is in the demo display state, the present demo display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the display is not in the demo display state, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not a demonstration display wait state is set. The demonstration display waiting state means a state in which the measurement of the demonstration waiting time has already started, and is a state in which “1” is set in the demonstration waiting flag of the main MPU 92.

  If it is not in the demo display waiting state, the process proceeds to step S2204, where the demo wait time information stored in advance in the main ROM 93 is read, and the demo wait time information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In the following step S2205, the demonstration waiting flag of the main MPU 92 is set to “1”, thereby setting a demonstration display waiting state. Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2203 that the display is waiting for the demonstration display, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”. When the special figure special electric timer counter is not “0”, the demonstration display process is terminated. In this case, the demo wait flag is cleared to “0” to cancel the demo display wait state.

  If the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, the demonstration display state is set by setting “1” to the demonstration display flag of the main MPU 92 in step S2207. At this time, the demo wait flag is cleared to “0” to cancel the demo display wait state. Further, the demonstration display state is canceled when the demonstration display flag is cleared to “0” when an effect for game times is newly started.

  In the subsequent step S2208, a demonstration start command is set as an output target. Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  The demonstration start command is a command for recognizing that it is the timing for starting the demonstration display to the sound emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a demonstration start command has been received as a production command in step S <b> 914. In S915, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the demonstration start command is executed. Specifically, a data table for performing an effect corresponding to the demonstration display through the display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and for demonstration display according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 58a and the speaker unit 59 perform the above-described effects.

  In the subsequent step S916, an effect command corresponding to the demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for performing a demonstration display effect from the command through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and performs a demonstration display effect according to the read data table. Is executed by the symbol display device 41.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, the ordinary power transmission control process executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 based on the result of opening determination is performed.

  In the ordinary power transmission control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37, first, in FIG. In the acquisition process, on the condition that the through flag of the main RWM 94 is set to “1”, the numerical information (that is, the hold information on the normal side) of the electric accessory release counter C4 is used as the electric charge hold area 94c. Execute the process stored in. However, the hold information on the normal map side is acquired within the upper limit value of the hold.

  In a succeeding step S2302, a process of reading information of a general-purpose power system counter provided in the main RWM 94 is executed. In a succeeding step S2303, a process of reading the ordinary power / general telephone address table from the main ROM 93 is executed. In step S2304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose / general power counter from the general-purpose / electric power address table is executed.

  Here, processing contents of steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.

  As already described, the ordinary map / electric power control process includes a process related to the effect for the ordinary figure and a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a, a process during opening of normal power and a process during closing of normal power are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

  It is possible to set numerical information of "0" to "4" for the general-purpose power counter, and the general-purpose power-address table starts with one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general-purpose power counter. Address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during normalization, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during open power, and the start address NSA4 is closed This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special power control, the main MPU 92 can determine which process is to be executed as the normal power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the process for changing the normal map, the process for confirming the normal map, the process for opening the power grid, and the process for closing the power grid using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  After executing the processing in step S2304, in step S2305, the zero flag setting processing on the normal map side is executed. In the setting process of the zero flag on the ordinary map side, the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read, and when the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter is “0”, the main side A process of setting “1” to the zero flag on the normal side provided in the register of the MPU 92 is executed. The general-purpose normal power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main MPU 92 to specify the update timing of the general-purpose normal power counter according to the passage of time.

  In the subsequent step S2306, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S2304 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common map change start process in step S2307, and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal map change process in step S2308. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing for determining the normal map in step S2309. If the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for releasing the general power in step S2310, and the acquired start If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the process during normal power supply closing in step S2311.

  In the normal change start process of step S2307, on the condition that the hold information on the general map side is stored, the open information of the electric accessory 34a is determined using the hold information on the normal map side, The processing for starting the display of the variation of the picture on the display unit 44 is executed. In this case, when information on the display continuation time in which the display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is displayed in a variable manner is set in the general-purpose ordinary power timer counter, and the display of the change of the pattern on the display unit for accessory 44 is started. The normal power counter is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the process of changing the normal map in step S2308, a process for updating the display on the accessory display unit 44 is executed. In this case, on the condition that the display continuation time has elapsed, the fixed time information is set in the normal-use ordinary power timer counter, and the ordinary-number ordinary power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  In the processing for determining the opening figure in step S2309, a process for displaying the result of the release determination this time on the display part 44 for an accessory over the fixed time on the drawing side is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. In the case of, the process for setting the number of times of opening in the case of opening the electric combination 34a when the electric combination 34a is opened using the process for setting the electric combination 34a in the open state and the current winning result as a trigger is executed. In this case, on the condition that confirmation of the fixed time on the normal figure side has been confirmed and the result of the release determination is a winning result, the information on the current opening duration in the electric accessory 34a is displayed as In addition, the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. On the other hand, if the result of the release determination is not the winning result after confirming the elapse of the fixed time on the normal map side, the setting for setting the electric accessory 34a to the open state is not performed and A process of clearing “0” is executed.

  In the normal power open process of step S2310, the process for keeping the electric accessory 34a in the closed state is executed when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is maintained and the closing timing is reached. In this case, on the condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a is set in the normal power timer counter and the electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, the normal power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  In the process of closing the electric power supply in step S2311, when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 34a and to make the electric accessory 34a open again, a process for opening the electric accessory 34a. Execute. In this case, on the condition that it has been confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 34a, information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is generally available. In addition to being set in the figure ordinary power timer counter, the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the ordinary figure ordinary electricity counter is updated from “4” to “3”. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the electric appliance 34a has been closed for a while, but it is not necessary to open the electric appliance 34a again, the setting for making the electric appliance 34a open is not performed. The process of clearing the figure ordinary power counter to “0” is executed.

  If any one of steps S2307 to S2311 is executed, the ordinary power transmission control process is terminated.

  As described above, the general map power control process is executed using the general map general power counter, the general map general power address table, and the general map general power timer counter, so that When the main MPU 92 specifies the situation in a series of game flows configured by opening and closing the object 34a, it is only necessary to refer to the ordinary power counter, and a plurality of flags as in the past. There is no need to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, when updating the ordinary power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. In addition, as with the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control process, the zero flag on the normal figure side is used, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

<Payout status reception processing>
Next, the payout state reception process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the power from the power interruption and power supply unit 114 of the launch control device 79 is supplied to the main RWM 94, but not supplied to the payout RWM 104. With this configuration, the capacity of the power supply unit 114 for power interruption can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the payout side RWM 104 is deleted (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout-side RWM 104 as in a conventional pachinko machine, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 can be performed in a situation where there are unpaid prize balls. When stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. If it does so, it will cause a great disadvantage to a player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the main RWM 94, and the main MPU 92 receives the HI level payout permission signal from the payout MPU 102. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 102. In the payout side MPU 102, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RWM 104 is the sum of the maximum number of prize balls (15 prize balls) for one winning and the permission reference number described later. The timing for switching the payout permission signal between the HI level and the LOW level is set so that In addition, this permission reference number is the minimum number of winning balls for one winning or less. Thereby, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be erased as much as possible. In other words, the payout permission signal is information output from the payout MPU 102 to the main MPU 92 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the main MPU 92.

  In the payout state reception process, based on information received from the payout side MPU 102 including a payout permission signal, a setting for determining whether or not it is possible to output a prize ball command to the payout side MPU 102 I do. Also, a process for confirming whether or not a disconnection has occurred in a signal path for transmitting a command from the main MPU 92 to the payout MPU 102 is executed.

  In the payout state reception process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the payout permission signal is at the HI level. The payout permission signal is a signal received from the payout side MPU 102 through the third signal path SL3 (see FIG. 6) as already described, and in the state where the payout side MPU 102 prohibits the output of the prize ball command, the LOW level. When the payout permission signal is output and the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level payout permission signal is output. The payout permission signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 92. In step S2401, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the payout permission signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the payout permission counter provided in the main RWM 94 is cleared to “0” in step S2402. The payout permission counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times that the payout permission signal is continuously confirmed to be at the HI level. In other words, the payout permission counter is a counter for measuring a period during which the payout permission signal is confirmed to be in the HI level. In this regard, the payout permission counter has a function as a timer counter, and its update mode is a mode of adding from the initial value “0”. In the subsequent step S2403, a disconnection confirmation state release process is executed. The disconnection confirmation state will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2407.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, disconnection confirmation processing is executed in step S2404. The disconnection confirmation process will be described later. In a succeeding step S2405, it is determined whether or not the payout permission counter is 5 or more. If the payout permission counter is less than 5, the payout permission counter is incremented by 1 in step S2406, and then the process proceeds to step S2407. If the payout permission counter is 5 or more, the process directly proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2407, it is determined whether an abnormal start command is received from the payout MPU 102 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 6). As described above, the abnormality start command is transmitted from the payout-side MPU 102 when a predetermined abnormality occurs regarding the payout of the game ball. If an abnormal start command has been received, processing for abnormal start is executed in step S2408. Specifically, by setting “1” to the payout abnormality flag provided in the main RWM 94, the payout abnormality state is set.

  Note that, as a process for starting an abnormality, a payout abnormality command may be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 72 as a sub-side control device. In this case, the voice light emission control device 72 is triggered by reception of the payout abnormality command. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the error lamp unit 58b or the speaker unit 59. Further, such a payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2407 or after the processing of step S2408 is executed, whether or not an abnormal termination command is received from the payout MPU 102 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 6) in step S2409. Determine whether. As described above, the abnormal end command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 102 when a predetermined abnormality regarding the payout of the game ball is released. If an abnormal termination command has been received, processing for abnormal termination is executed in step S2410. Specifically, the payout abnormality state is canceled by clearing the payout abnormality flag of the main RWM 94 to “0”.

  Note that, in the configuration in which the payout abnormality command is transmitted as described above as the abnormal start process, the payout abnormality cancel command may be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 72 as the abnormal end process. The sound emission control device 72 may be configured to end the payout abnormality notification that has already been executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2409 or after the processing of step S2410 is executed, a winning ball completion command is received from the payout side MPU 102 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 6) in step S2411. Determine whether or not. As described above, the winning ball completion command is transmitted from the payout MPU 102 when the winning ball is completed, and includes information on the number of completed winning balls.

  If the winning ball completion command is not received, the payout state receiving process is terminated as it is. If the winning ball completion command is received, the prize ball number external output process is executed in step S2412. The payout state reception process is terminated. In the external output process of the number of prize balls, a process for external output for causing the management computer of the game hall to recognize information on the number of prize balls completed this time is executed.

  The prize ball completion command may not be transmitted from the payout MPU 102. Further, in this configuration, the payout side MPU 102 is also electrically connected to the external terminal board 81, so that the external output of the information on the completion of the winning ball and the number of the winning balls is not passed through the main MPU 92. It is good also as a structure performed by the side MPU102.

<Discharge output processing>
Next, the payout output process executed in step S219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. The payout output process is a process for outputting a prize ball command to the payout MPU 102.

  In the payout output process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. If the front door frame 14 is open, the payout output process is terminated. If the front door frame 14 is closed, the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the payout permission counter of the main RWM 94 is “5” as the permission reference number. Here, as described above, the payout permission counter is incremented by 1 in one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) when the state of receiving the HI level payout permission signal continues. Since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 4 msec, it can be said that in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the reception of the HI level payout permission signal is continued for 20 msec or more which is the permission reference period.

  If the numerical information of the payout permission counter is not 5 or more, the payout output process is terminated as it is. If the numerical information of the payout permission counter is 5 or more, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the payout is abnormal. If it is in the payout abnormal state, the payout output process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the payout abnormal state, the process proceeds to step S2504.

  In step S2504, it is determined whether any prize ball counter is 1 or more. If all the winning ball counters are “0”, the payout output process is terminated as it is, and if any winning ball counter is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505, the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, a prize ball command output setting process is executed in step S2506. In the prize ball command output setting process, when the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands instructing the payout of 15 game balls are set as output targets. When the 15 prize ball counter is “0” and the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls is set as an output target. If both the 15 award ball counter and the 10 award ball counter are “0” and the 3 award ball counter is 1 or more, a 3 award ball command for instructing the payout of 3 gaming balls is issued. Set the output target.

  Note that the process of step S2505 may be executed after the process of step S2506. In addition, the priority when the prize ball command is set as the output target is not limited to the above pattern, and may be the reverse of the above pattern, for example, or may be configured as the output target according to the winning order Good.

  As described above, even if the main MPU 92 confirms the HI level payout permission signal, the main MPU 92 does not immediately identify that the output of the prize ball command is permitted, but continues for the permitted reference number set as a plurality of times. When the confirmation is made, it is identified that the output of the prize ball command is permitted (identified as being in the output permitted state). As a result, when a payout permission signal at the HI level is received due to electrical noise or the like, the possibility that a prize ball command is output is reduced.

  In addition, when the numerical information of the payout permission counter reaches the permission reference number, only one prize ball command is output, so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout RWM 104 is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In addition, when the process of step S2501 is executed, no prize ball command is output when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In the pachinko machine 10, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the payout of game balls is stopped. In this case, by preventing the prize ball command from being output when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the prize ball command from being newly output in a situation where the payout of the game ball is stopped. It becomes possible.

  After executing the processing in step S2506, in step S2507, “1” is set to the immediately after output flag provided in the main RWM 94. The immediately after output flag is a flag for confirming that the main side MPU 92 is immediately after the output of the prize ball command.

  In the subsequent step S2508, the information on the waiting time for disconnection confirmation (switching correspondence period) is read from the main ROM 93, and the information on the read waiting time is used as the disconnection confirmation timer counter (8 bit) provided in the main RWM 94. Set to timer counter TC8). Specifically, “3” is set in the disconnection confirmation timer counter. The disconnection check timer counter determines whether or not the time until the payout permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level after setting the prize ball command to be output exceeds the waiting time for disconnection check. It is a counter for specifying by. In addition, since the disconnection confirmation timer counter is decremented by 1 for each processing of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the waiting time for disconnection confirmation is 12 msec. Thereafter, the payout output process ends.

<Discharge control processing>
Next, payout control processing executed periodically (for example, 2 msec) by the payout side MPU 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether a prize ball command is received. Here, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command (hereinafter also referred to as type information), information indicating the number of prize balls (hereinafter also referred to as number information), and parity check (hereinafter referred to as check). The data amount is a plurality of bytes (for example, 3 bytes) so as to include information necessary for performing the data. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received by confirming information indicating that it is a prize ball command among the received command information.

  If a prize ball command has been received, error check processing is executed in step S2602. In the error confirmation process, a parity check is performed. When transmitting a prize ball command, the main MPU 92 calculates numerical information corresponding to the total number of “1” included in the type information and the number of “1” included in the number information, The calculated numerical information is transmitted as the check information. In the parity check, the total number of “1” included in the type information and the number of “1” included in the number information is calculated, and whether the calculation result matches the numerical information of the check information. Determine whether or not. If they do not match, the winning ball command is treated as having an error because there is a high possibility that it has been rewritten due to electrical noise during transmission.

  In step S2603, it is determined whether or not it is determined that an error has occurred in the error check process in step S2602. If it is determined that no error has occurred, the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the current prize ball command is confirmed from the number information and stored in the register of the payout side MPU 102 in step S2604. Execute. Further, in the confirmation process, it is confirmed whether or not the number of prize balls corresponds to any one of the information on the number of prize balls stored in advance in the payout ROM 103.

  In a succeeding step S2605, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal. If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, a prize ball number addition process is executed in step S2606. In the process of adding the number of prize balls, information on the number of prize balls confirmed in step S2604 is added to the prize ball number counter provided in the payout side RWM 104. In step S2607, the output state of the payout permission signal is set to the LOW level.

  That is, when the payout side MPU 102 receives one prize ball command, the payout permission signal output state is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Here, as already explained, the main MPU 92 transmits one prize ball command when the HI level payout permission signal is continuously confirmed over the five timer interruption processing (FIG. 9), At that time, the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”. In this case, after the prize ball command is set as an output target in the main MPU 92, the payout side MPU 102 sets the output state of the payout permission signal to the LOW level when triggered by the reception of the prize ball command. The time from when the payout permission signal is confirmed by the main MPU 92 until the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”, the numerical information of the payout permission counter changes from “0” to “5” which is the output permission reference number. The processing speed and the data transmission speed are set so that the time is shorter than the time until. Accordingly, only one prize ball command is transmitted from the main MPU 92 in response to the payout MPU 102 setting the output state of the payout permission signal to the HI level. As a result, the number of prize balls stored for the payout RWM 104 to which no memory holding power is supplied during power interruption can be suppressed, and the number of prize balls that are erased without being paid out when power interruption occurs. Can be suppressed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2601, an affirmative determination is made in step S2603, an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, or after the processing of step S2607 is executed, in step S2608, Execute the setting process. In the ball lending setting process, when a game ball lending instruction is received from the ball lending device Y, a setting for paying out the game ball according to the lending instruction is performed.

  In subsequent step S2609, when the award ball number counter of the payout RWM 104 is 1 or more or the required lending number is 1 or more, a process for driving the payout motor 77a of the payout device 77 to execute payout of the game ball Execute. However, when the front door frame 14 is open or when the lower plate 62a is full, even if the prize ball number counter is 1 or more or the required lending number is 1 or more, the game balls are paid out. Regulate not to be.

  Thereafter, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been paid out by confirming the detection result of the payout detection sensor 77b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, 1 is subtracted from the prize ball number counter or the required lending number in step S2611. In this case, the required number of loans is preferentially subtracted by 1, but the reverse may be possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2610, or after the processing of step S2611 is executed, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not payout relating to a prize ball is being executed. If the payout relating to the winning ball is being executed, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the numerical information of the winning ball number counter is less than or equal to 2, which is the permitted reference number. If the numerical information of the prize ball number counter is 2 or less, in step S2614, the output state of the payout permission signal is set to the HI level. As described above, by setting the output state of the payout permission signal to the HI level before the numerical information of the prize ball number counter becomes “0”, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the main RWM 94 is stored and held. If there is, the payout related to the prize ball can be executed continuously.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2612, a negative determination is made in step S2613, or after the processing in step S2614 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2615. In other processing, whether or not the lower plate 62a is full is specified, and when it becomes full, an abnormal start command is transmitted to the main MPU 92, and when the full state is released An abnormal termination command is transmitted to the main MPU 92. In addition, it is specified whether or not the tank 76 is in a no-ball state, and an abnormal start command is transmitted to the main MPU 92 when the ball is in a no-ball state. An end command is transmitted to the main MPU 92. Thereafter, the payout control process is terminated.

<Disconnection confirmation process>
Next, the disconnection confirmation process executed in step S2404 of the payout state reception process (FIG. 38) will be described.

  In the disconnection confirmation process, whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1 provided for transmitting a command from the main MPU 92 to the payout MPU 102 by serial communication is confirmed from the input state of the payout permission signal. Execute the process.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the immediately after output flag of the main RWM 94. If “1” is not set in the flag immediately after output, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is. If “1” is set in the flag immediately after output, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the numerical value information of the disconnection confirmation timer counter of the main RWM 94 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not a waiting time for disconnection confirmation has elapsed since the prize ball command was set as an output target. If it is not “0”, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2703.

  In step S2703, the payout permission counter of the main RWM 94 is cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S2704, it is determined whether or not the payout-side disconnection notification has been completed. The payout-side disconnection notification completed state refers to a state where a notification that a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1 has already been performed. In the payout-side disconnection notification completed flag in the register of the main MPU 92, “1” is set. If it is in the payout-side disconnection informed state, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the payout-side disconnection informed state, the process proceeds to step S2705.

  In step S2705, the payout-side disconnection notification command is set as an output target. The payout-side disconnection notification command is a command for causing the audio emission control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main-side MPU 92 has identified the occurrence of a disconnection in the first signal path SL1.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the sound emission control device 72 determines whether or not a payout-side disconnection notification command is received as a notification system command in step S <b> 901, and if the command is received, In step S902, notification processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to occurrence of disconnection on the payout side to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and in accordance with the read data table. Notification for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side is performed by the error lamp unit 58 b and the speaker unit 59.

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over control for production, control for permission of launch, and control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. Also, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning, and short circuit When the generation notification control overlaps with the timing, the notification control with the overlapping timing is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In subsequent step S903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the payout-side disconnection notification command is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads out a data table from the ROM of the display control device 121 so that notification corresponding to the occurrence of the disconnection in the first signal path SL1 is performed through the symbol display device 41, and the read data table Accordingly, the symbol display device 41 performs notification corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection.

  Returning to the description of the disconnection confirmation process (FIG. 41), after the process of step S2705 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, an external output start process for disconnection notification on the payout side is executed in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize that the occurrence of disconnection in the first signal path SL1 has been specified. In the subsequent step S2707, the payout side disconnection notification flag is set to “1” in the payout side disconnection notification flag in the register of the main MPU 92 to set the payout side disconnection notification completed state. Then, this disconnection confirmation process is complete | finished.

  In the payout side disconnection notification completed state, in step S2401 of the payout state reception process (FIG. 38), the reception of the LOW level payout permission signal is confirmed, a negative determination is made, and the release process is executed in step S2403. It is canceled by doing. In this case, the external output for notification of disconnection on the payout side is canceled, and the disconnection notification on the payout side is also canceled by transmitting a cancel command to the sound emission control device 72.

  Next, the manner in which prize balls are paid out and the manner in which disconnection confirmation of the first signal path SL1 is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  42A shows the output state of the payout permission signal, FIG. 42B shows the output status of the prize ball command, and FIG. 42C shows the required number of prize balls stored in the main RWM 94 (each 42 (d) shows the execution status of the prize ball payout, and FIG. 42 (e) shows the setting status of the disconnection notification completed state on the payout side.

  First, the case where the payout of the winning ball is normally performed will be described.

  In the situation where the payout of the winning ball is executed, the output information of the payout permission signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level when the numerical information of the winning ball number counter of the paying-side RWM 104 becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing t1. Can be switched. In this case, since the information on the required number of prize balls is stored in the main RWM 94, one prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 102 at the timing t2, which is the timing when the output permission reference period T1 has elapsed. . At this time, the required number of prize balls is updated. Further, since the timing at which the payout side MPU 102 receives the prize ball command is the timing before the payout of the permitted reference number of game balls is completed, the payout of game balls is continued without interruption.

  The payout MPU 102 that has received the prize ball command switches the output state of the payout permission signal from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of t3. This timing is the timing before the output permission reference period T1 has elapsed since the main MPU 92 set the prize ball command as an output target. Thereby, it is suppressed that a plurality of prize ball commands are transmitted continuously.

  Thereafter, the numerical information of the prize ball number counter of the payout RWM 104 again becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing of t4, whereby the output state of the payout permission signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Then, one prize ball command is transmitted to the payout-side MPU 102 at the timing t5 when the output permission reference period T1 has passed, and the output state of the payout permission signal from the HI level at the timing t6. Switch to LOW level.

  Thereafter, the numerical information of the prize ball number counter of the payout RWM 104 again becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing of t7, whereby the output state of the payout permission signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. However, since the required number of prize balls for the main RWM 94 is already “0”, no prize ball command is transmitted. Therefore, the payout of the prize ball is finished at the timing of t8.

  Next, a case where the payout of the winning ball is not normally executed due to the occurrence of disconnection in the first signal path SL1 will be described.

  When a new winning is generated at timing t9 in which the payout permission signal is already at the HI level, the required number of winning balls is set in the main RWM 94. Therefore, the main MPU 92 outputs a prize ball command to the payout MPU 102 at the timing of t10.

  However, since the disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the prize ball command is not received by the payout side MPU 102, and the prize ball is not paid out. Further, since the payout side MPU 102 has not received a prize ball command, the payout permission signal is not switched to the LOW level, and the HI level output state is maintained.

  On the other hand, at the timing t11 when the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation has elapsed after setting the prize ball command as an output target, the disconnection notification state on the payout side is set, and a notification to that effect is given. Be started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can be notified that the disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1, and it can be dealt with.

  Further, the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation is set to a time shorter than the output permission reference period T1, and in the state where the disconnection notification has been made on the payout side, the payout permission is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is executed. The counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, when a disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the output of a new prize ball command is prohibited before the next prize ball command is outputted after the one prize ball command is outputted. The number of prize balls that are invalidated without paying out can be suppressed.

  Further, whether or not a disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1 is determined from the HI level of the payout permission signal transmitted from the payout side MPU 102 to the main side MPU 92 so as to set the permission for transmitting the prize ball command. This is done through confirmation that switching to the LOW level does not occur. As a result, the disconnection confirmation can be performed using the configuration related to the permission setting of the prize ball command transmission. For example, it is not necessary to apply a hardware configuration or a software configuration for disconnection confirmation in the payout side MPU 102. The above-described excellent effects can be achieved while simplifying.

  In the output permission reference period T1, as described above, in the situation where the payout side MPU 102 does not actually permit the output of the prize ball command, the payout permission signal is set to the HI level once due to the influence of electrical noise. It is set to prevent the prize ball command from being output when it becomes. That is, by using a configuration for suppressing the influence of such electrical noise, it is possible to prevent the output of a new prize ball command when a disconnection occurs. Incidentally, such an effect can also be obtained from the configuration (process of step S2703) performed by preventing the period measured by the payout permission counter from becoming the output permission reference period T1 when the disconnection is confirmed. Can do.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first signal path SL1 transmits a command in the parallel system, the payout side MPU 102 confirms the disconnection by not receiving predetermined information from a part of the signal paths of the parallel system. Although it is possible, in this pachinko machine 10, since the first signal path SL1 is configured to transmit a command in a serial manner, such a countermeasure cannot be adopted. Therefore, it is effective to apply the processing configuration related to the disconnection confirmation as described above in a configuration in which a command is transmitted in such a serial system.

  In the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation, after the winning ball command is set as an output target in the main MPU 92, the payout permission MPU 102 sets the output state of the payout permission signal to the LOW level when the winning ball command is received. Further, the processing speed and the data transmission speed are set so that the time is longer than the time until the payout permission counter is cleared to “0” after the payout permission signal of the LOW level is confirmed by the main MPU 92. Is set. Therefore, in a situation where no disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the prohibition of the output setting of the prize ball command and the disconnection notification on the payout side are not executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If it is confirmed once that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure process is not performed, but the power failure process is performed when the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times. Thereby, when the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of the power interruption due to the influence of electrical noise, the possibility that the power failure process is executed is reduced. In this case, the power failure signal is monitored in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 10) in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Monitor multiple times. As a result, the effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed. In addition, the above effects can be achieved while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the time from when it is first confirmed that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, until the start of power failure processing. Can do.

  In addition, due to the influence of electrical noise, etc., in the situation where the power is cut off, the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption suddenly changes to the one corresponding to the state where the power interruption has not occurred. There is concern. In this case, if the condition for executing the power failure process is set to continuously check the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown, the power shutdown has occurred. Nevertheless, due to the influence of the electrical noise, the main MPU 92 does not recognize that the power supply has been cut off, and there is a concern that the power supply may be cut off completely without executing the power failure process. On the other hand, if the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed more than the trigger reference number (repetition count> trigger reference number) within the range where the power failure confirmation processing is performed for the predetermined number of repetitions, the power failure processing is executed. In this way, by removing the continuity of confirmation from the conditions for executing the process at the time of power failure, even when there is an influence of electrical noise as described above, the process at the time of power failure can be executed satisfactorily.

  A single confirmation that the winning signal output from the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b corresponds to the detection of the game ball is not made, and it is determined that a winning has occurred a plurality of times. Determined to occur. Thereby, when the winning signal becomes a signal corresponding to the passing of the game ball due to the influence of electrical noise, the possibility that the winning is determined to be generated is reduced. In this case, the winning signal is monitored in the winning detection process (FIG. 13) in step S209 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In the winning detection process, the same winning detection is performed once. The winning signal output from the sensors 31a to 35b is monitored a plurality of times. As a result, the effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed. In addition, while suppressing the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the time from when it is first confirmed that the winning signal corresponds to the detection of the game ball until it is determined that the winning is generated, the above-described effects are achieved. Can play.

  However, in the configuration in which the same winning signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation is performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence due to the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, a wait process for winning detection (step S402) between the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side and the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in one timer interrupt process (step S402). Further, the wait time is set so that the influence of electrical noise does not extend over the process of monitoring a set of winning information. Therefore, the winning of the game ball is not erroneously detected due to the influence of electrical noise.

  With regard to the determination of whether or not a winning has occurred, it is determined that a winning has occurred when the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball is continuously confirmed a plurality of times, whereas the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred is 10 times. If the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed 8 times or more, which is the trigger reference frequency, within the range of the number of repetitions of, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. In this way, depending on the type of event to be detected, as a condition for determining the occurrence of an event, distinguish between the case where the continuity of signal confirmation corresponding to the occurrence of the event is essential and the case where it is not essential Thus, as already described, it is possible to appropriately specify the occurrence of the event according to the type of event to be detected.

  In other words, by making continuity of the power failure signal indispensable, it is possible to more carefully suppress the possibility that the power failure process will not be executed even though the power is actually shut down. By making the continuity of the winning signal essential, it is possible to more carefully suppress the possibility that a winning will be determined even though no winning has actually occurred.

  Further, the continuous reference number required to determine that a winning has occurred is set to a number smaller than the trigger reference number required to determine that a power outage has occurred. As a result, regarding the confirmation of the occurrence of a power failure, the accuracy of confirmation can be improved by setting a large number of trigger reference times in correspondence with the fact that the continuity of confirmation of a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is not essential. . On the other hand, regarding the confirmation of the occurrence of winning, by setting the continuous reference number to be smaller than the trigger reference number corresponding to making the confirmation of the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball essential, Suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a winning signal that is not detected due to the influence of electrical noise is checked on a one-off basis due to the influence of electrical noise even though a winning has actually occurred. Is possible.

  In the configuration in which the prize ball command output from the main side MPU 92 is transmitted to the payout side MPU 102 through the first signal path SL1, it is determined whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1. Is performed through confirmation that switching from the HI level to the LOW level of the payout permission signal transmitted from the payout MPU 102 to the main MPU 92 does not occur. As a result, the disconnection confirmation can be performed using the configuration related to the permission setting of the prize ball command transmission. For example, it is not necessary to apply a hardware configuration or a software configuration for disconnection confirmation in the payout side MPU 102. The disconnection of the first signal path SL1 can be confirmed while simplifying.

  In the configuration in which the radio wave detection sensor 24b is provided so that fraud using the radio wave can be suppressed, even if the radio wave detection sensor 24b detects the radio wave, the game stop state is not immediately set, but the detection is performed. The game stop state is set in response to the occurrence of a winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 during the measurement of the monitoring time that starts with the above. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game stop state from being set when radio waves are detected by the radio wave detection sensor 24b due to noise or the like even though the game is being played normally.

  The update of the numerical information of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 used for measuring the passage of time by subtracting the numerical information is individually executed in each process to be used by the timer counters TC1 to TC10. Instead, it is executed by a timer update process (FIG. 17) set as a process different from these processes. Thereby, compared with the case where the update process of each timer counter TC1-TC10 is separately performed in each process used as those utilization object, simplification of a process structure is achieved.

  In the special figure special power control process, by specifying the content of the process to be executed by referring to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, a series of games composed of effects for game times and opening / closing execution modes When the main MPU 92 specifies which situation is in the situation, it is only necessary to refer to the special figure special electric power counter, and there is no need to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing as in the prior art. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Even if a game ball is fired through the launch handle 55, the main MPU 92 does not immediately permit the game ball to be fired, but the delay time lottery process in step S1104 of the launch control process (FIG. 23). And launching is permitted after a delay time corresponding to the result of the lottery process has elapsed. As a result, even if an attempt is made to intentionally operate the game ball firing start timing through the operation timing of the firing handle 55, the timing at which the firing solenoid 54 is in a driving state with respect to the timing at which the firing operation is actually performed is irregular. Therefore, this intentional operation can be invalidated.

  When the firing solenoid 54 is in a driving state, a corresponding notification is performed, so that it is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it when an intentional operation as described above is performed, It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the irregular timing of the firing solenoid 54 is not due to a failure.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 43 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 43, an inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the surface of the game board 24 as in the first embodiment, and the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion are attached. A game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the portion 49. In the gaming area, as in the first embodiment, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, the through gate 35, the variable display unit 36, the main display unit 43, An accessory display 44 and the like are provided. In addition to these, a winning device 122 is provided above the center frame 42 of the variable display unit 36.

  In the present embodiment, it is the same as in the first embodiment that the determination of success / failure is performed based on the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, but in the case of the determination of success / failure, the winning result is obtained. Instead of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed, the mode shifts to the pitch enabling mode in which the player can enter the winning device 122. Then, in the winning possible mode, a winning ball enters the winning device 122, and when the gaming ball wins a use passing portion provided in the winning device 122, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the process for advancing such a game is executed by the main MPU 92.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 122 will be described in detail.

  The winning device 122 includes a base body 123 in which an internal space that accommodates the rotating body unit 131 and allows the inflow of game balls toward the rotating body unit 131 is formed. The base body 123 is formed with a winning opening 124 that allows the game ball to be introduced into the rotating body unit 131, and a pair of opening / closing pieces 125 are provided for the winning opening 124. The opening / closing piece 125 is connected to a winning driving unit 126 such as a solenoid, and the winning driving unit 126 is driven and controlled by the main control device 71 so that the inflow of game balls from the winning port 124 is disabled. And an open position that allows inflow of game balls.

  The game ball that has flowed in from the winning opening 124 will be guided to the rotating body unit 131, but the game ball that has reached the rotating body unit 131 and the manner in which the inflowing game ball is guided to the rotating body unit 131 are guided to the base body 123. A window portion 127 is formed so that the state can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the game ball that has flowed into the winning device 122 flows down the rolling area formed in the winning device 122 or the guide path to the rotating body unit 131. Visible.

  The rotator unit 131 will be described. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the rotator unit 131.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the rotator unit 131 includes a guide passage forming member 132 and a discharge passage forming member 133. The guide passage forming member 132 is formed with a concave portion 134 that is recessed downward in the approximate center thereof. The recess 134 has a circular shape in plan view. An annular guide passage 135 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 134. The guide passage 135 is bilaterally symmetric and is inclined so as to become lower as it goes from the back center to the front center.

  The center on the back side of the guide passage 135 is a position from which the game ball that has flowed in from the winning opening 124 is led out, and the game ball reaches the center on the back side of the guide passage 135. The arrived game ball flows down one of the left and right inclined portions of the guide passage 135 and is guided to the front side of the guide passage 135, and the guided game ball is guided to the concave portion 134 side.

  The concave portion 134 has a winning passage portion 141 formed on the bottom surface thereof. The winning passage portion 141 communicates with a winning passage 142 formed in the discharge passage forming member 133, and the game ball that has passed through the winning passage portion 141 is discharged to the outside of the winning device 122 through the winning passage 142. . In this case, a winning detection sensor 143 is provided in the winning path 142, and a game ball passing through the winning path 142 is detected by the winning detection sensor 143.

  This detection result is input to the main controller 71, and when a game ball is detected by the winning detection sensor 143, processing for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is executed.

  In addition, a usable passing portion 144 is formed on the side surface of the concave portion 134. The used passage portion 144 communicates with the used passage 145 formed in the discharge passage forming member 133, and the game balls that have passed through the used passage portion 144 are discharged to the outside of the winning device 122 through the used passage 145. . In this case, a use detection sensor 146 is provided in the use passage 145, and a game ball passing through the use passage 145 is detected by the use detection sensor 146.

  The detection result is input to the main control device 71, and when a game ball is detected by the use detection sensor 146, processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  A motor 151 is attached to the discharge passage forming member 133 from below, and an output shaft 152 extending in the vertical direction of the motor 151 passes through the discharge passage forming member 133 and the guide passage forming member 132. A rotating body 153 is fixed to the output shaft 152. The motor 151 is driven and controlled by the main controller 71.

  The rotating body 153 has a substantially disk shape with a slightly smaller diameter than the concave portion 134 of the guide passage forming member 132, and is disposed in the concave portion 134. The rotating body 153 rotates as the motor 151 is driven. Ten spherical guide portions 154 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 153, and the spherical guide portions 154 are arranged at equal intervals. Among these, the five ball guide portions 154 are bottomless winning guide portions 154a, and the five ball guide portions 154 are bottomed advantageous guide portions 154b.

  Each ball guide portion 154 has a size that allows one game ball to enter, and a game ball led out from the front side of the guide passage 135 enters one of the ball guide portions 154. In this case, the game ball that has entered the winning guide portion 154 a reaches the upper portion of the winning passage portion 141 as the rotating body 153 rotates, and falls into the winning passage 142. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the advantageous guide portion 154 b reaches the side of the used passage portion 144 with the rotation of the rotating body 153 and enters the used passage 145.

  The game balls that have entered the winning device 122 described above are always guided to either the winning guide portion 154a or the advantageous guide portion 154b. In this case, half of the plurality of ball guide portions 154 in the rotating body 153 are the winning guide portions 154a, and the other half are the advantageous guide portions 154b. The rotating body 153 rotates at a constant speed. Therefore, when one game ball wins the winning device 122, the probability that the game ball is detected by the use detection sensor 146 is ½. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability may be lower or higher than ½.

  In the configuration in which the winning device 122 is provided as described above, it is assumed that the game ball is guided to the advantageous guide 154b by applying vibration to the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the game board 24 is provided with a vibration detection sensor 155 as shown in FIG.

  The vibration detection sensor 155 is installed on the back side of the game board 24 around the winning device 122. The vibration detection sensor 155 is electrically connected to the main control device 71, and the vibration result of the vibration detection sensor 155 is input to the main control device 71. The arrangement position of the vibration detection sensor 155 is not limited to the above, and the vibration detection sensor 155 may be arranged on the front door frame 14, the resin base 21, or the back pack unit 15.

  Next, the vibration detection process executed by the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the vibration detection process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not it is in the first stage state of vibration detection. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of vibration is detected while the winning device 122 is open, only the notification is performed without stopping the game, the occurrence of vibration is detected, and the winning passage portion 141 or the available passage portion is further detected. The game is stopped when winning to 144 occurs. In this case, the state in which only the notification is performed is the first stage state of vibration detection, and the state in which the game is stopped is the second stage state of vibration detection. Incidentally, the state where “1” is set in the first vibration detection flag of the main RWM 94 is the first stage state of vibration detection, and “1” is set in the second vibration detection flag of the main RWM 94. The state is the second stage state of vibration detection.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined in step S2802 whether the vibration detection sensor 155 is ON. Specifically, the vibration detection sensor 155 outputs a LOW level vibration detection signal corresponding to non-detection when no vibration is detected, and HI corresponding to the detection when vibration is detected. A level vibration detection signal is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The vibration detection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 92 when the signal is set as an input target to the main MPU 92 by the driver IC. In step S2802, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether the vibration detection sensor 155 is detecting vibration.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, numerical information corresponding to the vibration monitoring time (for example, 5 sec) is set in the vibration monitoring timer counter provided in the main RWM 94 in step S2803. As described above, when vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155, the vibration detection sensor 155 is first set to the first stage state of vibration detection, and further vibrates when a prize is awarded to the winning passing part 141 or the used passing part 144. The second stage state of detection will be set. However, the setting of the second stage state is performed during the detection of vibration or after the detection of vibration ends until the predetermined period passes or It is performed on condition that a winning for the use passage section 144 has occurred. The vibration monitoring time set in step S2803 corresponds to the predetermined period. Also, the numerical information set in the vibration monitoring timer counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted in the timer updating process (FIG. 17) of the main MPU 92.

  Incidentally, the monitoring time for vibration is required until the game ball passes through the winning passage portion 141 or the used passage portion 144 after the game ball reaches the guide passage 135 and is specified by the main MPU 92. It is set as a time longer than the longest time. More specifically, the monitoring time for vibration is from when the game ball passes the winning opening 124 until the game ball passes the winning pass portion 141 or the available pass portion 144 and is specified by the main MPU 92. It is set as a time longer than the maximum time required for.

  In a succeeding step S2804, it is determined whether or not the winning device 122 is being opened. If the winning device 122 is open, in step S2805, the first vibration detection flag of the main RWM 94 is set to “1” to set the first stage state of vibration detection. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to the 1st step state of a vibration detection, when the state in which the vibration detection sensor 155 is ON is confirmed in multiple times.

  In a succeeding step S2806, the first step command of the vibration system is set as an output target. The first step command of the vibration system is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the main MPU 92 has determined that the first step state of vibration detection is present.

  The sound emission control device 72 sets the notification continuation period when the first step command of the vibration system is received. In this case, 30 seconds is set as the notification continuation period, and the lapse of the notification continuation period is measured using a timer counter or the like provided in the sound emission control device 72. Then, the sound emission control device 72 continues the notification corresponding to the reception of the first step command of the vibration system until the notification duration period elapses. Incidentally, the notification continuation period is arbitrary as long as it is longer than the notification cycle set in step S2807, but the manager of the game hall can sufficiently confirm the notification for the first stage of the vibration system. The time is preferably set to continue.

  Also, the sound emission pattern for the first stage of the vibration system is set. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the first stage state of vibration detection to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and According to the read data table, the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 perform notification for the first stage of the vibration system. In addition, a command for the first stage corresponding to the reception of the first stage command of the vibration system is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads a data table for making notification corresponding to the first stage state of vibration detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and performs the first according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the vibration detection process (FIG. 45), after the process of step S2806 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, numerical information corresponding to the time of the notification cycle (for example, 1000 msec) is set in the vibration notification timer counter provided in the main RWM 94. In the present embodiment, in a situation where the first stage state of vibration detection is continuing, the first stage command of the vibration system is periodically transmitted so that the corresponding notification is continued. The vibration notification timer counter is used by the main MPU 92 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the first stage command. Also, the numerical information set in the vibration notification timer counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted in the timer update process (FIG. 17) of the main MPU 92. Thereafter, in step S2808, an external output start process for vibration detection is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that it is in the first stage state of vibration detection.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the first stage state of vibration detection has already been set, it is determined in step S2809 whether or not the state where the vibration detection sensor 155 is ON continues. . If it continues, in step S2810, numerical information corresponding to the vibration monitoring time (for example, 5 sec) is set again in the vibration monitoring timer counter provided in the main RWM 94.

  In a succeeding step S2811, it is determined whether or not the vibration notification timer counter is “0”. If it is “0”, the process advances to step S2806. Thereby, when the first stage state of vibration detection continues, the first stage command of the vibration system can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2809, the first stage state of vibration detection is canceled by clearing the first vibration detection flag of the main RWM 94 to “0” in step S2812. In step S2813, an external output canceling process for vibration detection is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the first stage state of vibration detection has been cancelled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2802, a negative determination is made in step S2804, a process in step S2808 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S2811, or a process in step S2813 is executed The process proceeds to step S2814. In step S2814, it is determined whether or not a winning to the winning passage unit 141 or the used passing unit 144 has occurred. In step S2815, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the vibration monitoring timer counter is larger than “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2814 or step S2815, the vibration detection process is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in both step S2814 and step S2815, that is, during the detection of vibration or after the detection of vibration ends and the monitoring time for vibration elapses, the winning passage portion 141 or the available passage portion 144 is used. If a prize is won, the process proceeds to steps S2816 to S2818.

  In step S2816, the second vibration detection flag of the main RWM 94 is set to “1” to set the second stage state of vibration detection. By setting the second stage state of vibration detection, “1” is set to the game stop flag in the game stop determination process in step S205 of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and the game stop state is set. The

  In a succeeding step S2817, the second step command of the vibration system is set as an output target. The second step command of the vibration system is a command for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 92 has determined that the vibration detection is in the second step state.

  The sound emission control device 72 sets the sound emission pattern for the second stage when the second stage command of the vibration system is received. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the second stage state of vibration detection to be performed through the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59 is read from the ROM of the sound emission control device 72, and According to the read data table, notification for the second stage is performed by the error lamp unit 58b and the speaker unit 59. In addition, a command for the second stage corresponding to the reception of the second stage command of the vibration system is transmitted to the display control device 121. The display control device 121 reads out a data table for making a notification corresponding to the second stage state of vibration detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 121, and performs the second operation according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the vibration detection process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S2817, the process proceeds to step S2818. In step S2818, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that it is in the second stage state of vibration detection. Thereafter, the vibration detection process ends.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 when vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  46A shows the state of vibration detection by the vibration detection sensor 155, FIG. 46B shows the opening state of the winning device 122, and FIG. 46C shows the setting state of the vibration monitoring time. 46 (d) shows the output status of the command from the main MPU 92, FIG. 46 (e) shows the winning status of the game balls to the passing sections 141 and 144, and FIG. 46 (f) The game stop state setting status is shown.

  First, a case where the vibration detection is not set to either the first stage state or the second stage state will be described.

  Detection of vibration in the vibration detection sensor 155 is started at timing t1 when the winning device 122 is closed, and detection of vibration is ended at timing t2. In this case, the measurement of the vibration monitoring time is started, but since the winning device 122 is closed, it is not set to the first stage state of vibration detection, and further, each winning portion 141, 144 is awarded a prize. Since it does not occur, it is not set to the second stage state of vibration detection. As described above, even if vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155 in this situation, the first stage state and the second stage state are not set, so that an accidental vibration occurs in a situation where the game is being played properly. It is possible to prevent the notification and the setting to the game stop state from being performed in the case where the game has ended.

  Next, a case where the vibration detection is set to the first stage state but is not set to the second stage state will be described.

  First, the winning device 122 is opened at the timing of t3, and the vibration detection sensor 155 starts to detect the vibration at the timing of t4, which is a state where the opened state continues. At this timing, notification corresponding to the start of vibration detection by outputting the first step command of the vibration system is started, but the game stop state is not set. Further, at the timing t4, the vibration monitoring time is set, and measurement of the vibration monitoring time is started. This set of vibration monitoring time is repeatedly executed while vibration detection continues. This state is the first stage state of vibration detection.

  Thereafter, when the vibration detection sensor 155 continues to detect the vibration, the notification period elapses from the timing t4 at the timing t5, so that the first-stage command of the vibration system again. Is output. However, since the notification for the first stage of vibration detection is continued at this timing, the notification is continued as it is only by resetting the notification continuation time of the notification.

  Thereafter, the vibration detection sensor 155 does not detect vibration at the timing t6. However, even in this situation, the measurement of the vibration monitoring time is continued. In particular, as described above, the set of the monitoring time for vibration is repeatedly executed while vibration detection continues, so that the vibration detection sensor 155 switches from a state where vibration is detected to a state where no vibration is detected. From this timing, the monitoring state is maintained for the vibration monitoring time. That is, the time during which the monitoring state is substantially continued is the sum of the time during which vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155 and the monitoring time for vibration. Thereafter, the winning device 122 is closed at the timing t7, and the measurement of the monitoring time for vibration is completed at the timing t8.

  In the above situation, the first stage notification is executed because no winning has occurred in each of the passing portions 141 and 144 during the period during which the vibration monitoring time is measured, that is, in the monitoring period. However, the game stop state is not set. Such a situation is when the vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155 due to the fact that the player has been playing a game and accidentally applied vibration to the pachinko machine 10. Can happen. In this case, since the game is not stopped, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from being disadvantaged while alerting the manager of the game hall.

  Next, the case where the vibration detection is set to the first stage state and the second stage state will be described.

  First, at a timing t9, the winning device 122 is in an open state, and the vibration detection sensor 155 starts detecting vibrations at a timing t10, which is a state in which the open state continues. At this timing, notification corresponding to the start of vibration detection by outputting the first step command of the vibration system is started, but the game stop state is not set. Further, at the timing of t10, the vibration monitoring time is set, and measurement of the vibration monitoring time is started.

  After that, when the vibration detection sensor 155 continues to detect vibration, the notification cycle elapses from the timing t10 at the timing t11, so that the first-stage command of the vibration system again. Is output.

  Thereafter, the vibration detection sensor 155 does not detect vibration at the timing t12. However, even in this situation, the measurement of the vibration monitoring time is continued. In particular, as described above, the set of the monitoring time for vibration is repeatedly executed while vibration detection continues, so that the vibration detection sensor 155 switches from a state where vibration is detected to a state where no vibration is detected. From this timing, the monitoring state is maintained for the vibration monitoring time.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13 during the period during which the vibration monitoring time is measured, a winning to the winning passing portion 141 or the available passing portion 144 occurs. In this case, first, the second command of the vibration system is output at the timing of t13, and the notification for the second step of vibration detection is started. In addition, with respect to the processing time of the timer interrupt processing at the timing of t13, the game stop state is set at the timing of t14 when the next processing time is started, and the progress of the game becomes impossible. At this time, the measurement of the monitoring time is ended.

  Even if vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 155 as described above, the passage unit 141 is not measured during the measurement of the vibration monitoring time that is started in association with the detection without immediately setting the game stop state. , 144 by setting the game stop state triggered by the occurrence of a prize, as described above, while giving no vibration to the legitimate player, illegally vibrated and used When an action for generating a prize for the passing section 144 is performed, it is possible to stop the progress of the subsequent game.

  The game stop state is set not only when the game ball passes through the used passage portion 144 during the measurement of the vibration monitoring time but also when the game ball passes through the winning passage portion 141. . As a result, when an illegal act of giving vibration so that the game ball passes through the use passage part 144 is performed, it is possible to deal with the illegal act regardless of whether or not it is successful. .

  In addition, since the application of vibration to the pachinko machine 10 is relatively easy to occur even in a state where a game is being played properly, even if vibration occurs during the closing of the winning device 122, winning to the passing portions 141, 144 is won. If no notification occurs, the notification is not performed, so that unnecessary notification can be suppressed.

  The monitoring state set when the vibration detection sensor 155 detects the vibration is not limited to the period in which the vibration detection sensor 155 detects the vibration, but also after the elapse of the period. It continues until elapses. As a result, even if a predetermined time lag occurs until it is determined that a winning to the passing portions 141 and 144 has occurred in the main MPU 92 after improperly applying vibrations, such an illegal act is dealt with. It becomes possible.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, monitoring using the radio wave detection sensor 24b can be invalidated. A processing configuration for performing the invalidation will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the radio wave detection cancellation processing executed by the main MPU 92.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not a waiting state for release setting. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the RWM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 79 is manually operated. If the manual operation has not been performed, this release processing is terminated as it is. If the manual operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, a release setting wait state is set. In a succeeding step S2904, a monitoring time (for example, 10 sec) for cancel setting is set. Then, this cancellation | release process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, whether or not an effect switch provided so that the player can manually operate in front of the front door frame 14 is manually operated in step S2905. Determine whether. It should be noted that the effect switch is operated, for example, when the destination effect is switched when operated, or when the type of display effect is different.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905, it is determined in step S2906 whether the monitoring time for release setting is “0”. If it is not “0”, this release processing is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the release setting waiting state is canceled in step S2907, and then this release processing is ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the radio wave detection invalidation state is set in step S2908. As a result, the radio wave detection process (FIG. 19) is not executed. Note that the radio wave detection invalidation state is set by setting “1” to the invalidation flag provided on the main RWM 94. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, The invalid state of the radio wave detection is maintained, and the main side RWM 94 needs to be initialized in order to cancel.

  As described above, it is possible to set the radio wave detection to the invalidation state. For example, in a game hall that is easily affected by radio waves, the radio wave detection process is invalidated. It is possible to prevent the notification or the game stop state from being set despite the fact that no output is made.

  In addition, since the radio wave detection invalidation state can be performed through the operation of the RWM erase switch and the production switch used for purposes other than the setting to the invalidation state, the hardware configuration is simplified and simplified. It is possible to provide a function for setting to the activation state.

  In addition, the player uses an effect switch that can be operated to set the disabled state. However, before the operation of the effect switch, the operation of the RWM erase switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player or a person who intends to perform an illegal act from setting the invalidation state.

  The processing configuration for setting the radio wave detection invalidation state is not limited to the above processing configuration. For example, the main control device as an operation means for performing switching operation between the valid state and the invalidation state. The switch 71 may be provided with a switch. In this case, setting to the valid state or the invalidation state is performed by determining the state of the switch.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination.

  (1) In the determination of the occurrence of a power failure, the continuity is not essential for the confirmation of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption, but the continuity may be required. In this case, the power failure process may be executed when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed twice continuously within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Further, a configuration may be employed in which a predetermined time is secured in order to suppress the influence of electrical noise between the execution of the confirmation process on the front side and the execution of the confirmation process on the rear side. Further, in order to secure the predetermined time, the main MPU 92 may perform a wait process that enters a process waiting state.

  (2) When determining the occurrence of a power failure, when checking the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption over the number of repetitions, the confirmation for the number of repetitions is performed over a plurality of timer interruption processes. It is good also as a structure. In addition, when determining whether or not an event to be detected has occurred, the continuity is not essential for the confirmation of the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event. Nevertheless, when focusing on the fact that the possibility of determining that the event has not occurred due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced, the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event in one processing of the timer interrupt process It is not essential that the confirmation is performed a plurality of times, and the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event may be confirmed only once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing.

  (3) In determining whether a winning has occurred, the continuity is indispensable for the confirmation of the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball, but the continuity may not be required. In this case, similarly to the processing related to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure in the first embodiment, two winning signals corresponding to the detection of the game ball are detected within a predetermined number of repetitions set as three or more times. It may be configured to determine whether or not a winning has occurred by determining whether or not a predetermined number of times that is set to a number that is equal to or greater than the number of repetitions and less than the number of repetitions is confirmed.

  (4) When the detection result of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is acquired within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the preceding shift process in step S401 (that is, the first confirmation process) And a configuration in which a wait process for winning detection (step S402) is executed so that a predetermined time is required between the shift process and the rear shift process (that is, the second confirmation process) in step S403. Thus, a configuration including other processing may be adopted.

  For example, a configuration may be included in which processing for performing control different from control using the result of the shift processing is included between the front shift processing and the rear shift processing. More specifically, the preceding shift process is executed at a timing before step S206 such as the first timing of the timer interrupt process, and the rear shift process is executed at a timing after step S206. It is good also as a structure. However, in order to prevent the time between the shift process on the front side and the shift process on the rear side from fluctuating greatly depending on the progress of the game, a process and a process in which the processing time tends to fluctuate in the timer interrupt process. In the case where a process that does not easily change in time is included, it is preferable that a process that does not easily change is not included between the shift process on the front side and the shift process on the rear side.

  (5) When determining the occurrence of a winning, no wait process (step S402) is set between the preceding shift process and the rear shift process, and these shift processes are continued as the process order. It is good also as composition which has. In addition, wait processing is set in processing that does not require continuity of signal confirmation corresponding to occurrence of the target event when specifying that the target event has occurred, such as processing related to determination of occurrence of power failure It is good also as a structure. In this case, although the target event has not occurred, the possibility that the target event is identified as being generated due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced.

  (6) In the determination of the occurrence of winning, the same winning detection sensor 31a to 35b is configured to determine that the winning is generated when the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball is confirmed twice consecutively. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be made in which it is determined that a winning occurs when three consecutive confirmations are made, and a winning signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball is detected over four or more consecutive reference times. It is good also as a structure which determines with generation | occurrence | production of a prize when confirming. In this case, the continuous reference number may be the same as or more than the trigger reference number related to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure.

  Further, in the configuration in which the continuous reference number is set to 3 or more in this way, in order to check the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball during the continuous reference number, a timer of two or more processing times is used. A configuration in which interrupt processing needs to be executed may be employed.

  (7) When determining the occurrence of winning, the result of calculating the confirmation result of the winning signal performed a plurality of times is stored for each processing of the timer interrupt process, and the winning is determined from the calculated results of a plurality of consecutive processing times. However, the configuration may be changed. For example, each confirmation result related to the same winning signal is individually stored within a predetermined number of confirmation times, and in the individually stored confirmation results, one confirmation result corresponding to non-detection and during detection A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that a winning has occurred when there is a range in which the confirmation results corresponding to the corresponding continuous reference number are continuous. This configuration is effective when the continuous reference count is not divisible by the number of confirmations of the same winning signal within the range of one timer interrupt processing.

  (8) For the same winning signal, first confirm the winning signal corresponding to the non-detection, and then confirm the winning signal corresponding to the detection during the continuous reference number of times, thereby winning the winning signal related to the winning signal In place of the configuration for determining that a prize has occurred, the winning signal corresponding to the detection is confirmed over the continuous reference number, and then the winning signal corresponding to the non-detection is confirmed to confirm that the winning has occurred. It is good also as a structure to determine. In this case, it may be configured that it is determined that a winning has occurred when the winning signal corresponding to the non-detection is confirmed a plurality of times.

  (9) When calculating the confirmation result of the winning signal performed a plurality of times for each processing of the timer interrupt processing, the calculation is not limited to the configuration in which the calculation is performed by logical product. , “1”, “1”, or “1”, “1”, “0”, if it is determined that a winning has occurred, an operation other than logical product may be performed.

  (10) The processing configuration relating to the determination of the occurrence of a winning in the first embodiment may be applied to specify the occurrence of an event different from the occurrence of a winning. For example, it may be applied to specify the open / closed state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and is applied when the occurrence of fraud is specified through the detection results of the magnet detection sensor 24a and the radio wave detection sensor 24b. May be.

  In addition, the processing configuration relating to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure in the first embodiment may be applied to specify the occurrence of an event different from the occurrence of a power failure. For example, it may be applied to specify the open / closed state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and is applied when the occurrence of fraud is specified through the detection results of the magnet detection sensor 24a and the radio wave detection sensor 24b. May be.

  (11) In the disconnection confirmation process (FIG. 41) of the first signal path SL1, in a situation where a winning ball command is output and the flag immediately after output is set to “1”, the numerical information of the disconnection confirmation timer counter is “ The addition of the payout permission counter may be prevented regardless of whether or not it is “0”, or the initialization of the payout permission counter may be repeated. For example, the configuration may be such that the processing in step S2406 is not executed in a situation where “1” is set in the flag immediately after output. Even in this case, the possibility of a new prize ball command being transmitted when a disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1 is reduced.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the switching correspondence period has passed through the disconnection confirmation timer counter, the payout permission counter is not initialized, and instead, the flag immediately after output is set to “1” Then, even if the numerical information of the payout permission counter becomes the numerical information corresponding to the permission reference period (specifically “5”), the configuration may be such that the output setting of the prize ball command is not performed.

  (12) A configuration may be adopted in which the disconnection confirmation timer counter is omitted, and the period corresponding to switching after the prize ball command is output is measured using the payout permission counter. Specifically, the payout permission counter is initialized when a prize ball command is output, and when the payout permission signal is at the HI level, 1 is added each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. When the numerical value information of the payout permission counter becomes the numerical information corresponding to the switching corresponding period (specifically “3”) without the payout permission signal being switched to the LOW level from the initialized state, the first It is good also as a structure which determines with the disconnection having generate | occur | produced in the signal path | route SL1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RWM 94 necessary for confirming the disconnection.

  (13) Immediately after outputting the prize ball command in the main MPU 92, the type of the prize ball command that is the object of the output is stored, and then the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 is not confirmed. May erase the stored information, and when the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 is confirmed thereafter, the stored type of award ball command may be output again after the disconnection is resolved. . In this case, when disconnection of the first signal path SL1 occurs, the possibility that the payout of the game ball is invalidated is reduced.

  Specifically, in the situation where the flag immediately after output is set to “1” after outputting the prize ball command, the type of the outputted prize ball command is stored in the main RWM 94, and the flag immediately after output is set. When cleared, the stored prize ball command is first set as an output target.

  (14) The processing related to the confirmation of disconnection of the first signal path SL1 in the first embodiment is performed with respect to a configuration in which the first signal path SL1 transmits a command in parallel instead of serial. You may apply. Even in this case, the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 can be confirmed using the configuration for transmitting the payout permission signal.

  Further, the processing related to the disconnection confirmation of the first signal path SL1 may be applied to a configuration in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 104 for power interruption to the payout-side RWM 104. Even in this case, a configuration using a payout permission signal to prevent a plurality of winning ball commands from being continuously transmitted from the main MPU 92 can be considered, and disconnection confirmation can be performed through confirmation of the payout permission signal. it can.

  (15) The payout permission signal is not limited to a configuration in which switching to a signal corresponding to non-permission is performed every time one prize ball command is output, and a plurality of predetermined prize ball commands are output. It is good also as a structure by which the switch to the signal corresponding to non-permission is performed whenever it is performed. Even in this case, the disconnection can be confirmed through the confirmation of the payout permission signal.

  (16) In a situation where a signal corresponding to permission is output from one of the two control devices, a signal including predetermined information is transmitted from the other, and one of the control devices is predetermined when the signal is received. The disconnection confirmation of the signal path different from the signal path for transmitting the prize ball command from the main MPU 92 to the payout MPU 102 is configured so that the signal corresponding to the permission is switched to the signal corresponding to the non-permission. You may apply for.

  For example, you may apply for the disconnection confirmation in the signal path | route for transmitting the command for presentation from the main side MPU92 to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72. FIG. Moreover, you may apply for the disconnection confirmation in the signal path | route for transmitting the command for an effect from the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 to the display control apparatus 121. FIG.

  (17) In the first embodiment, when the radio wave is detected or when a winning is made to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 during measurement of the monitoring time, the game stop state is set. It is not limited to the structure performed, It is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when winning to the general winning opening 31 or winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs.

  In addition, the game stop may be set when a radio wave is detected in a situation where a game ball is being paid out. When the game ball is paid out through the payout device 77, the radio wave is illegally output, so that the game ball is actually not paid out even though the game ball is paid out. An improper act that causes the detection sensor 77b to erroneously detect is assumed. On the other hand, the game stop state is set when radio waves are detected in a situation where game balls are being paid out as described above, so that despite the above fraudulent acts, It is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being controlled as usual. By the way, in order to achieve the effect, it may be configured to be set to the game stop state when the situation where the game ball is paid out occurs first, and then the radio wave is detected, The configuration may be such that the game stop state is set when the situation in which the radio wave is detected occurs first and then the payout of the game ball is started. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which suppresses the influence of the electromagnetic wave to the payout detection sensor 77b by providing the sheet | seat for electromagnetic shielding in the housing of the payout apparatus 77. FIG.

  In addition to the above, the game stop state may be set when a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs during the time when the radio wave is detected or the monitoring time is measured.

  (18) In the second embodiment, the game is stopped when the game ball passes through the winning passage portion 141 or the available passage portion 144 while the vibration is detected or during the measurement of the vibration monitoring time. It is not limited to the configuration in which the setting is performed. For example, in a configuration in which a sensor for detecting the passing of a game ball at the winning opening 124 is provided, vibration is generated in a situation where it is determined that a game ball is present in the winning device 122 through the detection result of the sensor. It is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when is detected.

  In addition, for example, the variable winning device 32, after passing through the big prize opening 32a, the continuation passing unit that causes the continuation to the next round game by the occurrence of the passage, and even if the passage occurs, to the next round game In a configuration in which a non-continuous passing portion where no continuation occurs and a distribution area where game balls are distributed to both the passing portions are provided, a situation where vibration is detected or a monitoring time for vibration The game stop state may be set when the game ball passes through the continuous passage part during the measurement of the state. The configuration may be such that the game stop state is set when a game ball passes through the continuous passage section. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when a vibration is detected in the condition where the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  In addition to the above, the game stop state may be set when transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs while vibration is detected or during measurement of the vibration monitoring time. In addition, a vibration detection sensor 155 is provided for the first embodiment, and the game stop state is set when a prize is generated for the upper operation port 33 in a state where vibration is detected. Also good.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, when a radio wave or vibration is detected and a winning is made to the operation ports 33 and 34 or when a game ball passes through the passing portions 141 and 144, the game stop state is entered. Instead of the configuration in which the setting is performed, a configuration in which only notification corresponding thereto is performed may be employed. In the said structure, it is good also as a structure where the alert | report of the 1st step | paragraph at the time of detecting an electromagnetic wave or a vibration is not performed.

  In particular, by applying the configuration with respect to the detection of radio waves in the first embodiment, a game is played in a situation where a game is being played normally when radio waves that are likely to be generated in a game hall environment or the like are detected. Setting of the stop state is prevented. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting is performed in the aspect which is not conspicuous for a player compared with other abnormality alerting | reporting. For example, a notification light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at the upper corner portion or the side portion of the pachinko machine 10, and the notification light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the radio wave detection is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification inconspicuous for the player and make it easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize the notification. Further, instead of or in addition to the notification configuration, an external output may be performed. Incidentally, the notification configuration may be applied to the first-stage notification in the first embodiment.

  Also, instead of setting to the game stop state, a setting for prohibiting or invalidating a game such as prohibition of launch, a setting for prohibiting the provision of game media such as paying out a game ball, a lottery such as a big hit lottery, etc. A configuration in which at least one of a setting for prohibiting the processing and a setting for invalidating the jackpot result may be performed.

  (20) In the second embodiment, the notification may be performed even when vibration is detected in a situation where the winning opening 124 of the winning device 122 is closed. In this case, the notification when the vibration is detected when the winning opening 124 is closed is less noticeable to the player than when the vibration is detected when the winning opening 124 is open. It is good also as a structure performed by the aspect. Specifically, in the notification when vibration is detected in a situation where the winning opening 124 is closed, a configuration in which notification is performed using the notification light emitting unit of (19) above can be considered. Also, for example, when vibration is detected in a situation where the winning opening 124 is closed, only external output is performed, and when vibration is detected in a situation where the winning opening 124 is opened, the pachinko machine 10 itself is operated. The notification may be performed.

  (21) In the second embodiment, the game stop state may not be set even if the game ball passes through the winning passage portion 141 in a state where vibration is detected. In this case, the vibration monitoring time is longer than the longest time required for passing the winning passage 124 after passing the winning opening 124, and after passing the winning opening 124, the winning passage section. 141 may be set as a time shorter than the longest time required to pass through 141.

  (22) In the second embodiment, in place of the winning passage portion 141, no reward is given to the player even if the passing of the game ball occurs. It is good also as a structure provided with the discharge | emission passage part for discharging | emitting the game ball simply. Even in this case, a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided to the discharge passage portion, and the discharge passage portion is played while the vibration is being detected or the vibration monitoring time is being measured. It is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when a ball | bowl passes.

  In addition, the opening / closing piece 125 is not opened when triggered by a lottery based on winning at the operating ports 33, 34, but triggered by the game ball entering a predetermined entrance. You may apply the structure which concerns on the vibration detection in the said 2nd Embodiment with respect to the pachinko machine which the opening / closing piece 125 will be in an open state.

  (23) A timer update process (FIG. 17) performed by collecting updates of a large number of timer counters TC1 to TC10 may be executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In this case, since the timer update process is executed at the first timing of the timer interrupt process that is periodically started, the update intervals of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 can be further fixed.

  Further, the timer update process may be executed before the process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process. In this case, it is possible to continue updating the timer counters TC1 to TC10 even in a situation where the game is stopped.

  (24) The timer counters TC1 to TC10 to be updated by the timer update process may be added instead of subtracted. However, in this configuration, in order to prevent the numerical information of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 from continuing to be added in a situation where the measurement using the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is not performed, The upper limit value of the numerical information may be set individually for TC10. Alternatively, an area of a flag under measurement is prepared for each timer counter TC1 to TC10, and numerical information is added only to the timer counters TC1 to TC10 in which “1” is set in the flag under measurement. Also good.

  In the timer update process, numerical information may be updated for both the subtraction timer counter and the addition timer counter. Even in this case, a configuration in which numerical information is not continuously added as described above may be applied to the addition type timer counter.

  (25) The timer counter to be updated by the timer update process is not limited to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, and the timer counter having a bit number smaller than 8 bits. Alternatively, a timer counter having a number of bits included in a range of 8 bits to 16 bits or a timer counter having a number of bits larger than 16 bits may be used.

  In the timer update process, the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 may be updated before the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. In this case, each address is set so that the address of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 is smaller than the address of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are set. The head address may be read out, but the remaining addresses may be derived each time by calculation using a timer address.

  (26) In the first embodiment, the demonstration display process (step S217) is set separately from the special figure special power control process (step S214). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The demo display process may be included in the special figure special electric control process. In this case, since the demonstration display is executed in a situation where the effect for game rotation is not executed and the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, the demonstration display process is included in the special figure variation start process in step S1307. In addition, it is preferable that the process from step S2202 to step S2208 of the demonstration display process is executed in a situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “0” and the hold information is not acquired.

  (27) The numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is set so as to be in ascending order in accordance with the progression order for each division of a series of game situations constituted by the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. However, the interval of the numerical information of each process related to the status of each category may be configured not to be “1”. In this case, the interval of the numerical information may be the same numerical value of “2” or more, and the numerical value may be irregular every processing. However, in order to simplify the process related to the updating of the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, a configuration in which the interval of the numerical information is the same numerical value is preferable. The same applies to the numerical information of the ordinary-use ordinary power counter.

  (28) The numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is set so as to be in descending order according to the progression order for each division of a series of game situations constituted by the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, the interval of the numerical information of each process related to the status of each division may be “1”, or may be a numerical value of “2” or more.

  In addition, the numerical information may be set irregularly with respect to the progress order of each situation instead of regular ascending order or descending order. In this case, in each processing of step S1307 to step S1313, it is necessary to add or subtract a numerical value corresponding to the transition destination situation to the special figure special electric power counter. The same applies to the case (27). The same applies to the numerical information of the ordinary-use ordinary power counter.

  (29) In the configuration in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the game result that triggered the transition in the opening / closing execution mode or the game state immediately before it, It is also possible to determine whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by determining whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” or more in the ordinary figure / electric power control process (step S215). Good. Even in the opening / closing execution mode, during the ending period, in the configuration where the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode according to the game result that triggered the transition and the previous game state, When it is confirmed that the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” or more and “5” or less in the control process, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode and is confirmed to be “6”. In this case, the support mode may be set to the high frequency support mode. In these cases, it is possible to control the electric accessory 34a using the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, and determine whether it is included in three or more kinds of situations by using the numerical information of 1. It can be grasped by referring to or by referring to the numerical information of 2, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced.

  (30) When an additional condition such as when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning portion such as the operation ports 33 and 34 in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed and an opening / closing execution mode is being opened, Alternatively, a special effect may be executed. In this case, by confirming that the special figure special electricity counter is not less than “1” and not more than “3”, the situation is either during execution of the effect for game rotation or opening of the opening / closing execution mode. I can understand.

  (31) In the first embodiment, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is individually set for the special power open process (step S1311) and the special power close process (step S1312). Instead of this, the special electric power opening process and the special electric power closing process may be set as one process in which only one piece of numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is set. In this case, when updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, only 1 addition or initialization needs to be executed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  By the way, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which the numerical information setting of the special figure special counter is set in descending order with respect to the progression order of each situation, when updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter Only one subtraction or initialization need be executed.

  (32) In the first embodiment, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is individually set for the special figure changing process (step S1308) and the special figure finalizing process (step S1309). However, instead of this, the special-figure changing process and the special-figure finalizing process may be set as one process in which only one piece of numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is set.

  In addition, the special electric fluctuation processing is classified into non-reach processing and processing after reach occurrence, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is individually set for each processing. Good.

  In addition, the special electric release opening process is divided into a process when the open time is long and a process when the open time is short, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is individually set for each of these processes. It is good also as composition which has.

  (33) The process for updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter may be set separately from the processes in steps S1307 to S1313. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process which updates a special figure special electricity timer counter is included in each process of step S1307-step S1313, respectively.

  (34) In the main process (FIG. 8), the process from step S110 to step S113 is repeated after the process at power recovery, but part of the process from step S207 to step S221 is a timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Instead, the main process may be set, and the process may be executed after the power recovery process. Even in this case, by applying the characteristic configuration in the first embodiment, it is possible to achieve an effect associated with the characteristic configuration.

  (35) In the payout side MPU 102, the permitted reference number that triggers the switching of the payout permission signal from the LOW level to the HI level is larger than the minimum number of winning balls for one winning, and the next largest number of winning balls The number may be less than the number or the maximum number of winning balls. In this case, even if three prize ball commands are output from the main MPU 92, a situation may occur in which the payout permission signal cannot be switched to the LOW level. Therefore, when three prize ball commands are output, the main MPU 92 may not perform the disconnection confirmation process. However, since it is preferable that the disconnection confirmation process is executed in a normal gaming state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the permitted reference number is a pitching portion (for example, a general game part in which a winning can occur even in the normal gaming state) It is preferable that the number is smaller than the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening 31).

  (36) There is a situation in which a movable object for production is provided in the center frame 42 and the like, and not only the movable object is operated as an effect for game times or an effect of opening / closing execution mode, but also a game ball is not being fired. It is good also as a structure which operates the said movable object also when continuing over a predetermined period. Even in this case, since the condition establishment signal is input from the power source and the launch control device 79 to the main MPU 92, the launch operation is started when the launch operation is started while the movable object is operating. The movement of the movable object can be terminated at the start of the movement and accommodated in the non-operation position.

  (37) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 55.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (38) A player in the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target of the determination of the success / failure and in the case where the hold information related to winning a prize in the lower working port 34 becomes the target of the determination of the success / failure It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. For example, when the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is a target of the success / failure determination, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the holding information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is used. May be assigned to either the most advantageous jackpot result or the low-probability jackpot result C.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (39) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 71 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 121 is controlled by the sound emission control device 72 based on a command output from the main control device 71 The device 121 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 121 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 72 to the display control device 121 are also arbitrary.

  (40) The device for executing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (41) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 71 determines whether or not the game is successful. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 71 is determined is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation time, and stop result in the game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (42) In each of the above embodiments, the main display unit 43 is configured to display a stop result corresponding to each game result. Alternatively, however, the main display unit 43 may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed on the main display part 43, and a stop result is displayed on the main display part 43 at random, and as a result from the display of the main display part 43 It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result it is.

  (43) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-mentioned embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which the electric game object is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special apparatus, or games in the specific area of the special apparatus The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are started to start rotating a reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Occurrence of a predetermined event (winning to the general winning opening 31, winning to the variable winning device 32, winning to the upper working opening 33, winning to the lower working opening 34, winning to the through gate 35, interruption of power interruption) Detection means for detecting (award detection sensors 31a to 35b, power failure monitoring board 96) and a result corresponding signal corresponding to the detection result in the detection means and the reception result of the predetermined event in the detection means Control means for executing special processing (processing in steps S509 to S517 in the main MPU 92, processing in steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 92) based on the generation reception result corresponding to the detection of the occurrence ( A main-side MPU 92),
The control means includes
Content confirmation means (step S401 in the main MPU 92) for executing content confirmation processing (steps S401 and S403 in the main MPU 92, steps S303 and S304 in the main MPU 92) for confirming the contents of the received result correspondence signal A function for executing the processes of steps S403 and S502 to S508, a function for executing the processes of steps S301 to S307 in the main MPU 92), and
Special processing execution means for executing the special processing based on the fact that the content confirmation processing for confirming that the content of the result corresponding signal is the generated reception result is executed a plurality of times (steps S509 to S509 in the main MPU 92) A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 92),
And performing the content confirmation process and the special process in a periodic process (timer interrupt process in the main MPU 92) that is periodically executed,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the content confirmation means executes the content confirmation processing for the result corresponding signal of the same detection means a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the regular processing.

  According to the feature A1, since the special processing is executed based on the content confirmation processing for confirming that the content of the result corresponding signal is the generation and reception result, the detection result of the detection means is electrically Noise effects are reduced. In this case, the content confirmation process for the signal corresponding to the result of the same detection means is executed a plurality of times within the range of one process of the regular process. As a result, the above-described effects can be achieved while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in designing the timing at which the periodic processing is executed, or since the event to be detected has first been identified. The effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the time until the special processing is started.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily execute processing for occurrence of an event that is a detection target in the detection unit.

Feature A2. The content confirmation means includes
First confirmation means for executing a first confirmation process (step S401 in the main side MPU 92) as the content confirmation process within the range of one processing time of the regular process (function to execute the process in step S401 in the main side MPU 92) When,
Second confirmation means (main main MPU 92) executes a second confirmation process (step S403 in the main MPU 92) as the content confirmation process at a timing later than the first confirmation process within the range of one process of the periodic process. The function of executing the process of step S403 in the side MPU 92),
Period setting means (main-side MPU 92) that takes a predetermined period or more before the second confirmation process is started after the first confirmation process is executed within the range of one process of the periodic process. Function for executing the process of step S402 in FIG.
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising:

  In the configuration in which the content confirmation processing for the result corresponding signal of the same detection means is executed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the periodic processing, the event that is actually the detection target does not occur. There is a concern that the state of the generated reception result due to the influence of electrical noise may be confirmed multiple times. On the other hand, according to the feature A2, it is configured that a predetermined period or more is required until the second confirmation process is executed after the first confirmation process is executed. As a result, the possibility of misrecognizing the occurrence reception result as described above multiple times is reduced, and as a result, the event that is actually the detection target has not occurred. Therefore, the possibility that special processing is executed is reduced.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the period setting unit is configured to wait for execution of processing in the control unit during the predetermined period.

  According to the feature A3, in the configuration in which it takes more than a predetermined period until the second confirmation process is executed after the first confirmation process is executed, the execution of the process in the control means is performed during the predetermined period. It will be in a waiting state. As a result, the fluctuation of the predetermined period is suppressed, and the execution interval between the first confirmation process and the second confirmation process is made constant, so that a special event after the event to be detected occurs. It can be suppressed that the time required for the processing to start varies greatly depending on the situation.

  Feature A4. The special process execution means confirms that the content of the result corresponding signal is not the generated reception result in at least one of the first confirmation process and the second confirmation process in one processing time of the periodic process, In addition, it is confirmed that the content of the result corresponding signal is the generated reception result in both the first confirmation process and the second confirmation process in the periodic process immediately before the processing time or in the next processing time. The gaming machine according to the feature A2 or A3, characterized in that the special process is executed in a process time on the rear side of the two consecutive process times of the regular process.

  According to the feature A4, when the detection target event occurs while suppressing the execution of the special processing multiple times in response to the occurrence of the detection target event once, the periodic processing is performed twice. Special processing can be started within the range of times.

Feature A5. The control means receives the result corresponding signal, and stores data 0 or data 1 as the input information. Further, one of the data 0 and data 1 becomes the input information that is the generated reception result, and the other becomes the input information. Comprising input means (input port 92a) configured to be input information that is not a generated and received result;
The content confirmation means includes
Predetermined arithmetic processing (main-side MPU 92) using each input information confirmed in each confirmation processing including the first confirmation processing and the second confirmation processing within the range of one processing time of the regular processing. In step S503) (function for executing processing in step S503 in the main MPU 92);
Storage execution means (function to execute the processing of step S504 in the main MPU 92) for storing information on the calculation result in the calculation execution means in the result storage means (first post-calculation area WA3, second post-calculation area WA4);
With
The special processing execution means is information when it is confirmed that the information of the calculation result in one processing time of the periodic processing is input information that is not the generated reception result in at least a part of the confirmation processing And based on the fact that it is confirmed that the input information is the generated reception result in all of the confirmation processes in the regular process immediately before the process time or in the next process time. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, which executes the special process.

  According to the feature A5, by executing the same arithmetic processing in each processing time of the regular processing, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature A5.

Feature A6. The content confirmation means executes the content confirmation processing within the range of one processing time of the periodic processing, and the confirmation reference number of times determined as a plurality of times of three or more,
The special process execution means includes
When the content confirmation processing is executed the confirmation reference number of times, the number of times that the content of the result corresponding signal is confirmed to be the generated reception result is determined as a plurality of times less than the confirmation reference number of times. Trigger specifying means (function for executing the process of step S308 in the main side MPU 92) for specifying that the number of times is the reference number or more;
A post-specification execution unit (a function for executing the processing in steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 92) that executes the special processing when the trigger identification unit specifies that the number of times is the trigger reference number or more,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, in order for the special process to be executed, it is not necessary to confirm that the result is an occurrence reception result in all of the content confirmation processes for the confirmation reference number of times determined as a plurality of times of three or more, What is necessary is just to confirm that it is a generation | occurrence | production reception result more than the opportunity reference | standard number of times set as the number of times smaller than the confirmation reference | standard frequency | count. As a result, even if an event that is actually a detection target has occurred but a state that has not been generated and received due to the influence of electrical noise is confirmed on a one-time basis, Special processing can be performed on the occurrence.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the content confirmation processing for the number of confirmation reference times determined as a plurality of times of three or more times is executed in order to execute the special processing for the occurrence of the detection target event as described above. The content confirmation process for the number of times of the confirmation reference is executed within the range of one process time of the regular process. Thereby, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the time until the special processing is started for the occurrence of the detection target event from being prolonged.

  Feature A7. The post-specification execution means is to execute the special process in the processing times of the periodic process in which the specification is performed when it is specified by the trigger specification means that the number is the reference number of times or more. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein

  According to the feature A7, as described in the function and effect of the feature A6, even if the state that is not generated and received due to the influence of electrical noise is confirmed only once, the occurrence of the event is special. In the configuration in which processing can be executed, special processing can be started within the range of one processing time of periodic processing when an event to be detected occurs.

Feature A8. The detection means is a power interruption detection means (power failure monitoring board 96) for detecting that operating power is no longer supplied to the control means,
The post-specification execution means executes, as the special processing, a power interruption process (step S309 to step S312 in the main MPU 92) that enables a return to the state before the power interruption after power recovery. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, characterized by

  If the power interruption process is executed, the progress of the game will be interrupted, so it is not preferable that the power interruption process be executed due to the influence of electrical noise. In such a case, if the power interruption process is not executed, it is not preferable because it is impossible to return to the state before the power interruption after the power recovery. On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature A6, the possibility that the power interruption process is executed due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced, and when power interruption occurs, The possibility that the process is not executed is reduced. Furthermore, when the operating power is no longer supplied to the control means, the power interruption process can be executed at an early stage.

  The invention of the above-described feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control device that controls the progress of the game. Signals are output from the detection devices such as various sensors and switches to the control device, and the control device executes various controls based on the input signals. The detection device includes, for example, a sensor that detects that a game medium has passed a predetermined passage, a monitoring circuit that monitors the occurrence of a power interruption of the gaming machine, and the occurrence of a predetermined external factor related to fraud. There is a sensor to be used.

  The detection device is connected to the control device through, for example, electrical wiring, and a signal indicating the occurrence of the event is output from the detection device to the control device in response to the occurrence of the corresponding event. Based on this signal, the control device executes predetermined control.

  The control device includes an input unit such as an input port, and a signal from the detection device is input to the input unit. For example, in a configuration in which the input unit has a plurality of bits, a signal from one detection device is input to one bit of the input unit. The bit basically stores “0”, and “1” is stored as detection information when a signal indicating the occurrence of the event is input from the detection device.

  The control device is set in the program to execute a loop process including a plurality of processes, for example, and is set to repeatedly start the loop process at a predetermined cycle. It is determined whether the information stored in the bit is “0” or “1”. And the presence or absence of the occurrence of the above event is specified based on the determination result.

  Here, in gaming machines, noise such as radio waves and static electricity may be generated. When the noise reaches the detection device or the input unit, the control device is not actually generated although the event does not occur. There is a risk of identifying that the event has occurred. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the detection information is stored in the input unit, it is not immediately determined that an event has occurred, but the detection information is stored for a predetermined period of time. It is considered that the influence of the noise is reduced by adopting a configuration that identifies the occurrence of an event when confirmed.

  However, if such a check is simply performed, a problem may occur due to, for example, the loop processing as described above, and the influence of noise may be reduced instead of or in addition to the problem. It is thought that it cannot be performed well.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Detection means (power failure monitoring board 96) for detecting the occurrence of a predetermined event (power interruption) and a result corresponding signal corresponding to the detection result in the detection means, and the reception result is received by the detection means A control means (main-side MPU 92) that executes special processing (processing in steps S309 to S312 in the main-side MPU 92) based on the occurrence reception result corresponding to the detection of the occurrence of the event. Machine,
The control means includes
Content confirmation means for executing content confirmation processing (step S303 and step S304 in the main side MPU 92) for confirming the content of the result-corresponding signal being received (function for executing processing in steps S301 to S307 in the main side MPU 92) When,
Special processing execution means (step S308 in the main MPU 92) for executing the special processing based on the result of the content confirmation processing being the result of confirming that the content of the result corresponding signal is the generated reception result. To the function of executing the process of step S312),
With
The special process execution means is
In the case where the content confirmation process is executed as a plurality of confirmation reference times determined as a plurality of times of three or more times, the number of times that the content of the result corresponding signal is confirmed to be the generated reception result is less than the confirmation reference number of times. First trigger specifying means (a function for executing the process of step S308 in the main MPU 92) for specifying that the number is the trigger reference number or more determined as a plurality of times;
First post-specification execution means for executing the special process when the first opportunity specification means is specified to be greater than or equal to the trigger reference number of times (function for executing the processes of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 92) When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, it is not necessary to confirm that the special process is performed as a result of reception in all of the contents confirmation processes for the number of confirmation reference times determined as a plurality of times of three or more, What is necessary is just to confirm that it is a generation | occurrence | production reception result more than the opportunity reference | standard number of times set as the number of times smaller than the confirmation reference | standard frequency | count. As a result, even if an event that is actually a detection target has occurred but a state that has not been generated and received due to the influence of electrical noise is confirmed on a one-time basis, Special processing can be performed on the occurrence.

Feature B2. The detection means is a power interruption detection means for detecting that operating power is no longer supplied to the control means,
The first post-specification execution means executes, as the special processing, a power interruption process that enables a return to the state before the power interruption after a power failure. Gaming machine.

  If the power interruption process is executed, the progress of the game will be interrupted, so it is not preferable that the power interruption process be executed due to the influence of electrical noise. In such a case, if the power interruption process is not executed, it is not preferable because it is impossible to return to the state before the power interruption after the power recovery. On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature B1, the possibility that the power interruption process is executed due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced, and when power interruption occurs, The possibility that the process is not executed is reduced.

Feature B3. As the detection means, a first detection means (power failure monitoring board 96) that detects the occurrence of a first event (power interruption) as the predetermined event, and a second event (to the general prize opening 31) as the predetermined event. Second detection means (award detection sensors 31a to 31a) for detecting occurrence of a prize, a prize to the variable prize winning device 32, a prize to the upper working port 33, a prize to the lower working port 34, a prize to the through gate 35). 35b), and
In the case where the content confirmation process for the detection result in the first detection unit is executed for the number of times of the confirmation reference, the first opportunity specifying unit is configured to output the result correspondence signal related to the first detection unit in the content confirmation process. In addition to specifying that the number of times confirmed that the content is the generated reception result is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number,
The first post-specification execution means performs a first special process corresponding to the occurrence of the first event as the special process when it is specified by the first trigger specification means that the number of trigger reference times is exceeded. Is to execute,
Further, when the content confirmation processing for the detection result in the second detection means is executed a plurality of times, the content of the result corresponding signal related to the second detection means in the content confirmation processing is the generated reception result. Second trigger specifying means for specifying that the number of times confirmed continuously is equal to or more than the continuous reference number set as a plurality of times (a function of executing the processing of steps S502 to S508 in the main MPU 92);
When it is specified by the continuous specifying means that the number is equal to or greater than the continuous reference number, the second special processing corresponding to the occurrence of the second event (the processing in steps S509 to S517 in the main MPU 92) is executed. A second post-specification execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S509 to S517 in the main MPU 92);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B3, according to the type of the event to be detected, it is possible to distribute the continuity of the generated reception result as the essential condition for execution as the special process execution condition. Thereby, special processing can be appropriately executed according to the type of event to be detected.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the continuous reference number is set to be smaller than the opportunity reference number.

  According to the feature B4, the accuracy of confirmation can be improved by setting a large number of trigger reference times corresponding to the fact that the continuity of confirmation of the generated reception result is not essential for the first event. On the other hand, for the second event, the second event is actually set by setting the continuous reference count to a number smaller than the trigger reference count in correspondence with the necessity of confirming the continuity of the generated reception result. In spite of the occurrence of the error, the occurrence of a situation in which the second special process is not executed due to a single confirmation of the state that is not the reception result due to the influence of electrical noise can be suppressed. It becomes possible.

Feature B5. A plurality of the second detection means are provided, and the specific process by the second trigger identification means and the second special process by the second post-specification execution means are individually executed for each second detection means. The configuration
The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the number of the first detection means is smaller than the number of the second detection means.

  Since the feature reference number B4 is provided and the trigger reference count is set to be greater than the continuous reference count, the capacity of the storage area required to determine the execution trigger for the first special process is the second special count. This tends to be larger than the capacity of the storage area required for determining the execution timing of the process. On the other hand, according to the feature B5, since the number of the first detection means is set to be smaller than the number of the second detection means, the capacity of the storage area required in the gaming machine can be reduced.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control device that controls the progress of the game. Signals are output from the detection devices such as various sensors and switches to the control device, and the control device executes various controls based on the input signals. The detection device includes, for example, a sensor that detects that a game medium has passed a predetermined passage, a monitoring circuit that monitors the occurrence of a power interruption of the gaming machine, and the occurrence of a predetermined external factor related to fraud. There is a sensor to be used.

  The detection device is connected to the control device through, for example, electrical wiring, and a signal indicating the occurrence of the event is output from the detection device to the control device in response to the occurrence of the corresponding event. Based on this signal, the control device executes predetermined control.

  The control device includes an input unit such as an input port, and a signal from the detection device is input to the input unit. For example, in a configuration in which the input unit has a plurality of bits, a signal from one detection device is input to one bit of the input unit. The bit basically stores “0”, and “1” is stored as detection information when a signal indicating the occurrence of the event is input from the signal output device.

  The control device is set in the program to execute a loop process including a plurality of processes, for example, and is set to repeatedly start the loop process at a predetermined cycle. It is determined whether the information stored in the bit is “0” or “1”. And the presence or absence of the occurrence of the above event is specified based on the determination result.

  Here, in gaming machines, noise such as radio waves and static electricity may be generated. When the noise reaches the detection device or the input unit, the control device is not actually generated although the event does not occur. There is a risk of identifying that the event has occurred. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the detection information is stored in the input unit, it is not immediately determined that an event has occurred, but the detection information is stored for a predetermined period of time. It is considered that the influence of the noise is reduced by adopting a configuration that identifies the occurrence of an event when it is continuously confirmed.

  However, if it is essential to continuously check the occurrence of an event that is a detection target, there is a possibility that processing corresponding to the occurrence of the event cannot be performed satisfactorily depending on the content of the event.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled through bidirectional communication between the first control means (main MPU 92) and the second control means (payout MPU 102),
A first communication means (first signal path SL1) through which information from which the first control means is an output source in the bidirectional communication is transmitted;
A second communication means (third signal path SL3) through which the information that is output from the second control means in the bidirectional communication is transmitted;
With
The first control means performs output setting of specific information (prize ball command) to the first communication means in a state where permission information (HI level payout permission signal) is received through the second communication means. 1st output setting means (function to execute processing of Step S2506 in main side MPU92),
The second control means includes
Specific response execution means (steps S2609 in the payout side MPU 102) that executes specific response processing (steps S2609 to S2611 in the payout side MPU 102) corresponding to the reception of the specific information through the first communication means. The function of executing the process of step S2611),
The output of the permission information is set so that the output of the permission information is stopped based on reception of the specific information in a situation where the permission information is output to the second communication means and the permission information is output. A second output setting means for changing the setting (a function for executing the processes of steps S2607 and S2612 to S2614 in the payout-side MPU 102);
With
Further, the first control means may perform a predetermined non-end handling process based on the fact that the reception of the permission information is not ended after the output setting of the specific information is performed by the first output setting means. A gaming machine comprising non-end corresponding execution means (a function of executing disconnection confirmation processing in the main MPU 92) for executing the processing in steps S2703 to S2707 in the main MPU 92.

  According to the characteristic C1, the first control unit performs output setting of the specific information in a situation where the permission information is received, and the second control unit executes a specific response process corresponding to the specific information based on the reception of the specific information. At the same time, the output of the permission information is stopped so that the output of further specific information is prohibited by the first control means. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific handling process satisfactorily.

  In this case, the first control unit executes the non-end corresponding process when the permission information is continuously received after the output setting of the specific information is performed. Thereby, when the communication abnormality has occurred in the first communication means, it can be dealt with.

  In particular, in this configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a configuration for specifying whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred in the first communication unit in the second control unit, and the specific handling process is executed well as described above. For this reason, it is possible to deal with a communication abnormality by using a communication configuration for the purpose.

  From the above, it becomes possible to cope with a communication abnormality between a plurality of control means satisfactorily.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the first output setting means performs output setting so that the specific information that is information of a plurality of bits is transmitted serially.

  According to the feature C2, the number of signal paths for transmitting the specific information can be reduced by transmitting the specific information in a serial manner. However, in the configuration in which the specific information is transmitted serially in this way, the second case when a communication abnormality such as a disconnection occurs in the signal path, compared to the configuration in which the specific information is transmitted in parallel. It is difficult to specify the fact by the control means. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature C1, it is possible to cope with the communication abnormality satisfactorily.

  Feature C3. The non-end corresponding execution unit performs the non-end corresponding process as the non-end corresponding process while the reception of the permission information continues after the output setting of the specific information is performed by the first output setting unit. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming machine is forbidden to output.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to suppress the output setting of the specific information from being continuously performed despite the occurrence of communication abnormality in the first communication unit.

Feature C4. The first output setting means includes:
Permission reception measuring means (payout permission counter) for measuring a period during which the reception of the permission information has been continued since the start of reception of the permission information;
Output setting execution means for performing the output setting of the specific information based on the fact that the period measured by the permission reception measuring means has become a predetermined permission reference period (the process of step S2506 in the main MPU 92 is executed) Function)
When the output setting of the specific information is set by the output setting execution means, initialization execution means for initializing the information of the period measured by the permission reception measurement means (the process of step S2505 in the main MPU 92 is executed) Function)
With
The non-end corresponding execution means, as the non-end corresponding processing, when the switching corresponding period shorter than the permission reference period has elapsed after the output setting of the specific information is performed by the output setting execution means, The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein output of information is prohibited.

  According to the feature C4, even if the first control means receives the permission information, the first control means does not immediately transmit the specific information, but transmits the specific information when reception of the permission information is continued over the permission reference period. As a result, in the case where the situation where the permission information is received due to the influence of electrical noise or the like in spite of the fact that the output of permission information is not set in the second control means, It is possible to suppress the output setting of the specific information.

  In addition, when the output setting of the specific information is performed, the information of the period measured by the permission reception measuring unit is initialized, and the reception of the permission information is continued after the output setting. Prohibits the output of specific information when a switching correspondence period shorter than the permission reference period elapses. Thereby, when communication abnormality has occurred in the first communication means, it is possible to prevent new output of specific information, and to suppress the influence of noise on the output setting of specific information as described above. It can be realized using the configuration.

Feature C5. After the output setting of the specific information is performed by the first output setting means, the specific information is normally received by the second control means, and the permission information is output by the second output setting means. Is configured to require a predetermined period at the longest until it is stopped and recognized by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the switching corresponding period is a period longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the feature C5, in the configuration that uses the measurement of the switching corresponding period to prevent the new output of the specific information when the communication abnormality occurs in the first communication means, the first communication means The switching response period is set as a period longer than a predetermined period required until the first control means recognizes that the output of the permission information is stopped in a situation where no communication abnormality has occurred. Thereby, it can suppress that the process for prohibiting new output of specific information is performed in the condition where the communication abnormality has not generate | occur | produced in the 1st communication means.

  Feature C6. The non-end corresponding execution means prohibits the output of the specific information by preventing the period measured by the permission reception measuring means from becoming the permission reference period. A gaming machine according to C4 or C5.

  According to the feature C6, prohibiting a new output of specific information in a situation where a communication abnormality occurs in the first communication means is realized using a configuration that suppresses the influence of noise on the output setting of the specific information. be able to.

Feature C7. After the output setting of the specific information is performed by the first output setting means, the specific information is normally received by the second control means, and the permission information is output by the second output setting means. Is configured to require a predetermined period at the longest until it is stopped and recognized by the first control means,
The non-end corresponding execution means executes a notification process (steps S2705 and S2706 in the main MPU 92) for executing predetermined notification as the non-end corresponding process (the step S2705 and step S2706 in the main MPU 92). A function of executing the processing of step S2705 and step S2706 in the main MPU 92)
The notification executing unit is configured to receive the permission information even when a period longer than the predetermined period has elapsed since the output setting of the specific information was performed by the first output setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the notification processing is executed.

  According to the feature C7, when the reception of the permission information is continued after the output setting of the specific information is performed, the predetermined notification is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make the game hall manager recognize that a communication abnormality has occurred in the first communication means. In this configuration, the reception of the permission information is continued for a period longer than the predetermined period required until the first control means recognizes the stop of the permission information output in a situation where no communication abnormality has occurred in the first communication means. In such a case, processing for executing the predetermined notification is performed. Thereby, it can suppress that the said predetermined | prescribed alert | report is performed vainly in the condition where the communication abnormality has not generate | occur | produced in the 1st communication means.

Feature C8. The specific information is payout command information (prize ball command) set as an output target by the first output setting means based on the fact that the game content becomes the payout game content,
Based on the receipt of the payout command information, the specific response executing means pays out the number of game media corresponding to the received payout command information as the specific response processing (payout device 77). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein a process for driving and controlling the game machine is executed.

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to suppress the payout command information from being continuously transmitted despite the occurrence of communication abnormality in the first communication unit.

  In addition, in the game machine having a game area in which a game ball flows down and a game ball where a game ball can be inserted is installed, the “payout game content” It is good also as entering a ball. Further, in a gaming machine having a pattern display means for executing variable display of a pattern, and a game medium is paid out according to the stop picture of the pattern display means, the stop picture of the pattern display means corresponds to the payout of the game medium. It may be a stop picture.

Feature C9. Power supply means at power interruption (power supply section for power interruption 114) for supplying power at power interruption in the power interruption state,
The first control means includes
Game content specifying means (a function for executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 92) for specifying that the game content is the payout game content;
When it is specified by the game content specifying means that the content of the payout game has been obtained, prize information corresponding to the specified payout game content (numerical information of 3 prize ball counters, numeric value of 15 prize ball counters) Information and numerical information of ten prize ball counters), and further, while the electric power is supplied to itself, the information can be stored and retained, and the electric power at the time of power interruption is received in the power interruption state. Side storage means (main side RWM94);
With
The first output setting means sets the payout command information as an output target on the condition that the prize information is stored in the first-side storage means.
The second control means stores award payout number information (award ball number information) corresponding to the payout command information based on the receipt of the payout command information, and power is supplied to itself. The second storage means (payment-side RWM 104) that enables storage and storage of information and does not receive the power at the time of power interruption in the power interruption state,
The specific correspondence executing means, based on the fact that the prize payout number information is stored in the second side storage means, allows the payout means to pay out the number of game media corresponding to the prize payout number information. It performs processing to drive control,
The second output setting means does not set the output of the permission information when the number of game media corresponding to the prize payout number information stored in the second side storage means exceeds the permission reference number. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the gaming machine is a product.

  According to the feature C9, power during interruption is supplied to the first storage unit, whereas power during interruption is not supplied to the second storage unit. Thereby, compared with the structure in which the power at the time of power interruption is supplied to both the first side storage means and the second side storage means, the cost for the memory holding function at the time of power interruption is reduced. However, in the configuration in which power is not supplied to the second storage unit in this way, information cannot be stored in the second storage unit when the power is interrupted. In this case, if all the unpaid information for the paid-out game content up to the power interruption state is erased, it may cause a great disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, when the number of game media corresponding to the prize payout number information stored in the second side storage means exceeds the permission reference number, the second control means does not set permission information output. As a result, the unpaid information stored in the second storage means is limited to a certain number of media, and the possibility of the above-described inconvenience occurring when the power is interrupted is reduced.

  In the above configuration, the non-end corresponding process is executed based on the fact that the reception of the permission information is not ended after the output setting of the specific information is performed. It is possible to cope with a communication abnormality of the first communication means while using a configuration that suppresses the deletion of everything.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a plurality of control devices are known. In the gaming machine, the progress of the game is controlled by executing predetermined control in each control device while communicating between the plurality of control devices.

  As a configuration including the plurality of control devices, for example, a pachinko gaming machine includes a main control device and a payout control device. In the main control device, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has entered a ball entering part provided in the game area, and if a ball enters the ball entering part related to payout of the game ball occurs. A prize ball command is output from the main control device to the payout control device. The payout control device drives and controls the payout device so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

  Here, in the configuration including a plurality of control devices as described above, a communication abnormality may occur. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of control devices are connected through electrical wiring, disconnection of the electrical wiring or abnormalities in the connection portion between the electrical wiring and the control device may occur.

  In this case, if the abnormal state is maintained, the progress of the game is not well controlled, and there is a possibility that the player may be disadvantaged, for example. If it does so, it is preferable to set it as the structure which can cope with it when the above communication abnormalities generate | occur | produce, but it is not preferable that the structure concerning communication will become extremely complicated in order to apply the said structure.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Abnormality detection means (radiowave detection sensor 24b in the first embodiment, vibration in the second embodiment) that detects the occurrence of an abnormal factor (radiowave in the first embodiment, vibration in the second embodiment) Detection sensor 155);
An abnormality handling process based on the occurrence of the abnormality factor detected by the abnormality detection means (in the first embodiment, the processes in steps S205, S206 and S814 to S816 in the main MPU 92, the second In the present embodiment, the abnormality handling execution means for executing steps S205, S206 and steps S2816 to S2818 in the main MPU 92 (in the first embodiment, steps S205, S206 and S814 in the main MPU 92). A function for executing the process of step S816, a function for executing the processes of step S205, step S206, and step S2816 to step S2818 in the main MPU 92 in the second embodiment);
In gaming machines equipped with
The abnormality handling execution means is configured to detect a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, the upper operating port 33 or the lower action) that is different from the occurrence of the abnormality factor. When the winning to the mouth 34, in the second embodiment, the passing of the game ball of the winning passing part 141 or the used passing part 144) is established or established, the abnormality handling process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature D1, when the occurrence of the abnormality factor is detected, the abnormality handling process is not executed, but the occurrence of the abnormality factor is detected and another condition different from that is satisfied or is satisfied. Anomaly handling process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the conditions for executing the abnormality handling process complex, and the abnormality handling process is executed when an abnormal factor occurs accidentally in a situation where the game is being played properly. The possibility of being reduced is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately deal with a situation in which an inconvenience occurs when the occurrence of an abnormal factor is overlooked and an inconvenience occurs even when an abnormality handling process is executed just by detecting the occurrence of the abnormal factor.

  Feature D2. The abnormality handling unit is configured to detect the abnormality when the occurrence of the abnormality factor is detected by the abnormality detecting unit, and the occurrence of an event relating to the provision of a privilege is grasped as the predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein

  The fraudulent act is performed for the purpose of illegally granting a privilege, and when an abnormal factor occurs due to the fraudulent act, an event related to granting a privilege is also likely to occur. On the other hand, in the situation where the game is played regularly, it is unlikely that the occurrence of an abnormal factor and the occurrence of an event relating to the provision of a privilege will occur at the same time. By adopting the configuration of the feature D2 in such circumstances, when an unauthorized person generates an abnormality factor to carry out fraud, it can be dealt with through the execution of the abnormality handling process, and the game is regularly performed. In the situation where an abnormality factor occurs, the possibility of executing the abnormality handling process is reduced.

  Feature D3. The abnormality handling execution means is configured to detect an abnormality monitoring period (monitoring time in the first embodiment, second implementation) even when the abnormality detection means has detected the occurrence of the abnormality factor. In the game according to the feature D1 or D2, the abnormality handling process is executed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition until the vibration monitoring time) has elapsed. Machine.

  According to the feature D3, even if there is a time lag from when the situation where the abnormality factor has occurred to when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an abnormality handling process for the above.

Feature D4. Abnormality notification processing (in the first embodiment, in step S804 in the main MPU 92) for executing abnormality notification when the abnormality detection means detects the occurrence of the abnormality factor. Processing, abnormality notification execution means for executing processing in step S2806 in main MPU 92 in the second embodiment (function in step S804 in main MPU 92 in the first embodiment), second implementation In the form of the main MPU 92 in step S2806)
The abnormality handling process is a process that is different from the abnormality notification process, and is a process that restricts execution of at least a part of the process executed to control the progress of the game. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

  According to the feature D4, when an abnormality factor is detected by the abnormality detection means, it is possible to alert the game hall manager by first giving an abnormality notification. Further, when an abnormal factor occurs and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the abnormal factor is generated by restricting execution of at least a part of the processing executed to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding as usual despite the fact that the act has been performed. Furthermore, by carrying out the steps for the occurrence of abnormal factors step by step, such as mild treatment to severe treatment, it is possible to appropriately deal with the occurrence of abnormal factors due to fraud, It is possible to reduce the influence of the configuration for dealing with the legitimate player.

  Feature D5. Any of the features D1 to D4, wherein the abnormal factor is a factor that may occur in a situation where a regular game is being performed on the gaming machine in a situation where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall The gaming machine according to 1.

  An abnormal factor may occur even in a situation where a game is being played regularly, and may also occur when the purpose is fraud. On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts and to reduce the influence of the configuration for performing such a countermeasure on a regular player.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the abnormality detection unit is a radio wave detection unit (a radio wave detection sensor 24b) that detects the generation of a radio wave having a predetermined frequency as the abnormality factor.

  The radio wave can be generated even in a situation in which a game is normally played in the game hall, and is generated for the purpose of causing a predetermined detection sensor to perform a false detection. On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts and reduce the influence of the configuration for performing such a countermeasure on a regular player.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the abnormality detection unit is a vibration detection unit (vibration detection sensor 155) that detects occurrence of vibration as the abnormality factor.

  The vibration can occur even in a situation in which a game is regularly played in the game hall, and for example, for the purpose of changing the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area to the path toward the desired entry part. Is generated. On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to cope with fraudulent acts and reduce the influence of the configuration for performing such a countermeasure on a regular player.

Feature D8. Provided in a game area where game balls flow down, and includes a ball entry means (winning device 122) into which the game balls flowing down can enter,
The entry means is
A space partition portion (base body 123) in which an internal space is partitioned from the front of the gaming machine and an entrance portion (winning port 124) for allowing the flowing game balls to enter the internal space is formed; ,
An inlet opening / closing means (opening / closing piece 125) which opens and closes when the opening and closing operation state is set based on the opening and closing operation condition being established, while opening and closing the inlet portion;
An advantageous passage portion (used passage portion 144) that is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered in the internal space can pass and becomes advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the passage;
A discharge portion (winning pass portion 141) that is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered in the internal space can pass and discharges the game ball that does not pass through the advantageous passage portion from the internal space;
Distributing means (guidance path 135, rotator 153) that is provided in the internal space and distributes the game balls that have entered the internal space to either the advantageous passage portion or the discharge portion;
With
The abnormality response executing means executes the abnormality response processing when the occurrence of the vibration is detected by the vibration detection means and a game ball passes through the advantageous passing portion as the predetermined condition. There is a gaming machine according to Feature D7.

  According to the feature D8, since the ball entry means is provided, the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area is increased. However, in the configuration in which the ball entering means is provided, the game ball is intentionally given to the advantageous passing part side in a situation where the game ball is about to be distributed to the advantageous passing part or the discharging part by the distributing means, and the gaming ball is moved to the advantageous passing part side. The act of trying to distribute is assumed. On the other hand, when the occurrence of vibration is detected by the vibration detecting means and the game ball passes through the advantageous passing part, the abnormality handling process is executed. Proceeding as usual can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, it is not a frequent occurrence that a game ball passes through the advantageous passage portion. In a situation where a game is being played properly, the passage of the game ball in the advantageous passage portion and the occurrence of vibration are at the same time. Is unlikely to occur. Therefore, in the configuration capable of dealing with the above fraudulent acts, it is possible to reduce the influence on the regular player by the configuration for taking such a countermeasure.

  Feature D9. The abnormality handling execution means executes, as the abnormality handling process, a process that restricts execution of at least a part of the process executed to control the progress of the game. Game machines.

  According to the feature D9, when the occurrence of vibration is detected by the vibration detecting means and the game ball passes through the advantageous passing portion, at least a part of the processing executed for controlling the progress of the game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding as usual when the above fraud is performed. On the other hand, it is not a frequent occurrence that a game ball passes through the advantageous passage portion. In a situation where a game is being played properly, the passage of the game ball in the advantageous passage portion and the occurrence of vibration are at the same time. Is unlikely to occur. Therefore, in the configuration capable of dealing with the above fraudulent acts, it is possible to reduce the influence on the regular player by the configuration for taking such a countermeasure.

Feature D10. Abnormality notification executing means for executing abnormality notification processing (processing in step S2806 in the main MPU 92) for executing abnormality notification when vibration generation is detected by the vibration detection means. (Function to execute the process of step S2806 in the main side MPU 92),
The abnormality notification execution means executes the abnormality notification triggered by the occurrence of vibration when the vibration detection means detects the occurrence of vibration in a state where the opening / closing operation state is not set. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, wherein the gaming machine is not.

  According to the feature D10, when the occurrence of vibration is detected by the vibration detection means, it is possible to alert the manager of the game hall by notifying the abnormality. However, for a player who is playing a regular game, when a part of his body accidentally hits a gaming machine and vibrates the gaming machine, or as a result of maintenance being performed on other gaming machines in the gaming hall, If a notification for abnormality is given until the gaming machine in which the player is playing vibrates, it becomes troublesome. On the other hand, when vibration occurs in a state that is not set to the open / close operation state, an abnormality notification is not executed in response to the vibration, so the configuration for performing the abnormality notification is a regular player. It is possible to reduce the influence on the operation.

  Feature D11. The abnormality handling execution unit may be configured to use the advantageous passage portion until an abnormality monitoring period (vibration monitoring time) has elapsed even when the state in which the occurrence of vibration is detected by the vibration detecting unit is finished. The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the abnormality handling process is executed when a game ball has passed.

  According to the feature D11, even if there is a time lag from the end of the situation where the vibration is generated until the game ball passes through the advantageous passing portion, the abnormality handling process is performed for the occurrence of the event. It becomes possible to execute.

  Feature D12. The abnormality handling execution means executes the abnormality handling processing even when the occurrence of the vibration is detected by the vibration detecting means and a game ball passes through the discharge portion. Thru | or the game machine of any one of D11.

  When an illegal act that intentionally generates vibration to cause the passing of the game ball in the advantageous passing part is performed, the gaming ball passes through the discharge part without causing the passing of the gaming ball in the advantageous passing part as a result. It can happen to pass. On the other hand, according to the feature D12, since the abnormality handling process is executed even when such an event occurs, regardless of whether or not the fraudulent act is performed, it is successful. It becomes possible to deal with the fraud.

  The invention of the feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  A pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, has a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out when the gaming balls enter a pitching portion provided in the gaming area. is there. In addition, a special winning lottery opening operation is repeatedly performed based on the winning result based on the winning result based on the game ball entering the operating port in the game zone provided in the game area. Some transition to gaming state.

  In addition, the game area is provided with a ball entry part, and the internal space is opened based on the ball entry into the ball entry part, and the game ball has entered the advantageous opening provided in the internal space. Some transition to a special gaming state based on this.

  Here, in the gaming machine described above, a game ball is caused to enter a desired location by using a magnet to cause a game ball to enter a desired location, or by hitting the game machine with a hand or the like. Action is assumed. In addition to these, it is assumed that the game ball is erroneously detected by outputting a radio wave toward a sensor for detecting the entrance to the entrance portion or a sensor for counting the number of game balls to be paid out.

  In dealing with the above fraudulent acts, a detecting means for detecting an abnormal factor that causes the fraudulent acts is provided, and when the detecting means detects the cause, a special process corresponding to that is provided to the control device. Can be considered. For example, as a special process, a process for prohibiting a subsequent game can be considered. In addition to this, for example, a configuration in which notification processing is performed to notify the surroundings or the management device on the game hall side of the occurrence of the fraudulent action is conceivable. In some cases, a configuration that prohibits the payout of game balls can be considered as a special process.

  However, depending on the type of factor that causes the fraud, the factor may not be caused by the fraud, but may occur accidentally in the process of playing a regular game. In such a case, if the special processing as described above is uniformly executed, there is a risk that a player who is playing a game will be disadvantaged or uncomfortable.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to pachinko machines, and has a detection means for detecting a factor causing an illegal act, and special processing corresponding to the detection of the factor by the detection means. This is also a problem that occurs in other game machines that perform the above in the control device.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First period measuring means (16-bit timer counter TC1) and second period measuring means (16-bit timer) for measuring the period by storing numerical information and periodically updating the stored numerical information Counter TC2),
First processing execution means (main main electric power control processing in the main MPU 92) that executes numerical processing stored in the first period measurement means and performs processing corresponding to the reference result A function for executing special figure special electric control processing in the side MPU 92),
Second process execution means for referring to the numerical information stored in the second period measurement means and executing a second process for performing a process corresponding to the reference result (a normal power control process in the main MPU 92) ( A function of executing the ordinary power control process in the main MPU 92),
The first period is executed at a processing timing different from the first process and the second process within the range of one process time of the periodic process that includes the first process and the second process and is periodically executed. Update process execution means (main process for executing steps S603 to S606 and steps S611 to S614 in the main MPU 92) of the numerical information stored in the measurement means and the second period measurement means. Function of executing timer update processing in the side MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the update of the first period measurement unit and the update of the second period measurement unit are performed collectively, the update is executed individually in each process in which these period measurement units are referred to. In comparison, it is possible to collect and read out the processing program for updating each period measuring unit and the reading of numerical information from each period measuring unit.

  As described above, in a configuration including a plurality of period measuring means, it is possible to suitably perform processing related to updating of the period measuring means.

Feature E2. The first period measuring means measures a period by performing either one of addition or subtraction of the numerical information, and the second period measuring means is the addition or subtraction of the numerical information. The period is measured by updating the numerical information in the same update manner as the first period measuring means,
The update processing execution means uses the same processing program in both cases of updating numerical information of the first period measuring means and updating numerical information of the second period measuring means. The game machine according to Feature E1, wherein the game machine executes update processing.

  According to the feature E2, the update of the numerical information of the first period measuring unit and the updating of the numerical information of the second period measuring unit are both performed using the same processing program, thereby reducing the storage capacity. . In addition, since updating of the numerical information is performed collectively, it is possible to collectively read out the processing programs.

Feature E3. Both the first period measuring means and the second period measuring means measure a period by subtracting the numerical information after storing predetermined numerical information that is “1” or more,
The update process executing means executes a process of subtracting numerical information stored in the first period measuring means as the update process and subtracts numerical information stored in the second period measuring means. The processing is executed, and further, the processing is executed so that the numerical information of the first period measuring means and the second period measuring means is not maintained in a state of being less than “0”. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

  For example, in a configuration in which the numerical information of each period measuring unit is updated using an addition formula, whether or not each period measuring unit is measuring a period is referred to information different from the numerical information of the period measuring unit. It is necessary to grasp each item individually. On the other hand, according to the feature E3, the first period measurement unit and the second period measurement unit are configured so that the numerical information is updated by a subtraction method and is not maintained in a state where the update is less than “0”. Done. As a result, in the configuration in which the updating of the numerical information of the first period measuring unit and the updating of the numerical information of the second period measuring unit are performed collectively, the processing in the situation where the period measurement is not performed by these period measuring units Simplification is achieved.

Feature E4. A period measuring means (payout permission counter) corresponding to addition for measuring the period by storing numerical information and periodically adding the stored numerical information;
Means for executing other processing for performing processing corresponding to the reference result while referring to the numerical information stored in the period measurement means corresponding to the addition (function for executing payout output processing in the main MPU 92);
With
The game machine according to Feature E3, wherein the update of the period measurement means corresponding to the addition is executed in the other processing.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to use the period measurement unit corresponding to addition while suppressing the processing configuration of the process for updating the first period measurement unit and the second period measurement unit from being complicated.

Feature E5. In addition to the first period measuring unit and the second period measuring unit, the third period measuring unit stores the numerical information and measures the period by periodically updating the stored numerical information. It has period measuring means (16-bit timer counter TC3),
Based on referring to the numerical information stored in the third period measuring means, the third process (step S809 in the main MPU 92 and the processes in steps S804 to S806 executed based on the result) is executed. 3 processing execution means (function to execute the processing of step S804 and step S806 executed based on the result of step S809 in the main MPU 92),
The first to third period measurement means are provided by allocating storage areas having different addresses in the dual-purpose storage means (main RWM 94) that can read and write information by the update processing execution means. And
The difference between the numerical value of the address of the first period measuring means and the numerical value of the address of the second period measuring means is the difference between the numerical value of the address of the second period measuring means and the numerical value of the address of the third period measuring means. Are the same,
The update process execution means executes the update process at a process timing different from the first to third processes within the range of one process of the regular process, and corresponds to the address of the first period measurement means. After the numerical information of the first period measuring unit is read with reference to the numerical information stored in advance and the numerical information is updated, the numerical information corresponding to the difference with respect to the numerical information stored in advance is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the numerical information of the second period measuring unit and the numerical information of the third period measuring unit are updated through sequential addition.

  According to the feature E5, in updating the first to third period measuring means, only numerical information corresponding to the address of the first period measuring means needs to be stored in advance, and the second period measuring means and the second period measuring means For the three-period measuring means, it is not necessary to store numerical information corresponding to these addresses in advance. As a result, the storage capacity required for storing numerical information in advance can be reduced. Further, the numerical information corresponding to the difference is added to the numerical information corresponding to the address of the first period measuring means, and the addresses of the second period measuring means and the third period measuring means are used as the update process executing means. Therefore, the process related to address recognition can be simplified.

Feature E6. The first to third period measurement means have a storage capacity of the same bit, and numerical information corresponding to the difference is numerical information of a first difference corresponding to the storage capacity,
As the period measuring means for measuring the period by storing numerical information and periodically updating the stored numerical information, the storage capacity is the same bit including the first to third period measuring means. In addition to the specific period measuring means group in which the numerical information corresponding to the difference becomes the numerical information of the first difference, the bit is different from each period measuring means of the specific period measuring means group and is the same as each other A fourth period measuring means (8-bit timer counter TC5) and a fifth period measuring means (8-bit timer counter TC6), each having a bit storage capacity;
Based on referring to the numerical information stored in the fourth period measuring means, fourth process executing means (steps in the main MPU 92) for executing the fourth process (the processes in steps S812 to S816 in the main MPU 92). Based on referring to the numerical information stored in the fifth period measuring means and the fifth process (the step S1208 in the main MPU 92 and the result thereof). 5th process execution means (function to execute the process of step S1204 to step S1206 executed based on the result of step S1208 in the main MPU 92 and the result). ,
The difference between the numerical value of the address of the fourth period measuring unit and the numerical value of the address of the fifth period measuring unit is a second difference different from the first difference,
The update processing execution means reads the numerical information of the period measuring means corresponding to the last address in the specific period measuring means group, updates the numerical information, and then updates the numerical information of the current address to be referred to The numerical information of the fourth period measuring means is updated by adding the numerical information of the first difference and the numerical information of the fourth period measuring means is updated. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the numerical information of the fifth period measuring means is updated by adding the numerical information of the second difference to the numerical information of the fifth period.

  According to the feature E6, since the storage capacity is different between the specific period measuring unit group including the first to third period measuring units and the fourth to fifth period measuring units, the periods to be measured are different from each other. The storage capacity can be allocated according to the measurement target period. Further, even when the storage capacities are different as described above, the numerical information corresponding to the address stored in advance through the method of setting the address for each period measurement unit is the first period measurement among the above period measurement units. It ’s good only by means.

Feature E7. In the regular processing, the processing time until completion is relatively easy to change (processing in steps S211 to S215 in the main MPU 92) and difficult to change (processing in steps S201 to S209 in the main MPU 92). And
Any of the features E1 to E6, wherein the update process is set so that the update process is executed within a range not including the variable process from the start timing of the periodic process. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature E7, even when the processing time of other processes included in the periodic process fluctuates, it is possible to reduce the influence of the fluctuation on the update timing of each period measuring unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to update each period measurement means periodically.

  The feature E group invention is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control device that controls the progress of the game. In this case, a configuration provided with a timer counter is known as means used for specifying timing for executing a predetermined process in a control element such as a CPU provided in the control device.

  An example of how to specify the execution timing using the timer counter will be described. A storage element that includes a large number of storage areas and that can read and rewrite information stored in the storage areas is provided separately from the control element. A configuration in which a timer counter is provided using a storage area of the storage element is known.

  In the case of the configuration, the control element executes the update process so as to add or subtract the numerical information stored in the timer counter at a predetermined cycle. And when the numerical information memorize | stored in the timer counter turns into predetermined numerical information, a predetermined process will be performed in a control element.

  Here, it can be considered that the number of necessary timer counters increases as the processing executed by the control element becomes more complicated. In this case, there is a concern that not only the processing load increases due to the complexity of processing but also the processing load of the timer counter update processing increases, and the processing load of the control element increases extremely. On the other hand, if the number of timer counters is not increased, there is a concern that the processing becomes rather complicated.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. The program storage means (main-side ROM 93) storing the processing program and the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing in the main-side MPU 92) are periodically executed using the processing program stored in the program storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means (main MPU 92) for controlling the progress,
The program storage means is a first situation (special special-purpose electric counter) in which the periodic process is executed a plurality of times when the situation does not occur at the same time in the game process and stays in each situation. The situation where the numerical information of the special figure counter is “0”), the second situation (the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “1”) and the third situation (the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”) ), A processing program for the first situation, a processing program for the second situation, and a processing program for the third situation are stored,
The control means includes
First situation process execution means (in the main MPU 92) for executing a first situation process (special figure variation start process in the main MPU 92) for controlling the progress of the first situation using the processing program for the first situation. Function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing),
Second situation process execution means (in the main MPU 92) that executes a second situation process (a special figure changing process in the main MPU 92) that controls the progress of the second situation by using the processing program for the second situation. A function to execute special map processing)
Third situation process execution means (in the main MPU 92) for executing a third situation process (a special figure determining process in the main MPU 92) for controlling the progress of the third situation using the processing program for the third situation. Function to execute special figure determination processing), and
It is possible to store numerical information in a predetermined range including numerical information corresponding to each of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation, and correspond to each situation when a condition for each situation is satisfied. Situation correspondence storage means (special figure special electricity counter) in which numerical information is updated to be a thing,
The numerical information stored in the situation correspondence storage means is read out, and the processing program corresponding to the read numerical information is read out, and any one of the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process is performed. Program reading means to be executed (function to execute the process of step S1306 in the main MPU 92);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature F1, since the first to third situations are set as situations that do not occur at the same time in the game process, various situations exist as the game process. Even if it takes a long period of time for each situation of the first to third situations to end, the periodic process is executed a plurality of times in each situation, so the execution interval of the regular process is not dependent on the period of those situations Can be determined.

  In this case, for example, if a flag corresponding to each situation is prepared and the flag is individually confirmed in each situation process and the process to be executed is grasped, the flag confirmation process is repeatedly performed. The processing configuration cannot be simplified.

  On the other hand, the situation corresponding | compatible memory | storage means which can memorize | store the numerical information of a predetermined range including the numerical information corresponding to each of the 1st-3rd situation was provided, and it respond | corresponded to the numerical information memorize | stored in the said memory | storage means In this configuration, the processing program is read and processing corresponding to any of the first to third situations is started. As a result, it is not necessary to repeatedly perform the flag confirmation processing as described above, so that various situations can exist in the game process while simplifying the processing configuration.

  As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of situations are set, it is possible to suitably perform processing for advancing those situations.

Feature F2. Based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (acquisition of hold information) is established, and based on the fact that a predetermined end condition (end of the effect for game times or end of the opening / closing execution mode) is established A specific game situation to end (a situation in which an effect for game times and an opening / closing execution mode are executed) is set,
The gaming machine according to F1, wherein the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation respectively correspond to predetermined sections having different execution timings in the specific gaming situation.

  According to the feature F2, it is possible to grasp which section is staying in a specific gaming situation by using numerical information stored in the situation corresponding storage means, and the gaming situation can be determined. Simplification of the processing configuration for progressing is achieved.

  Feature F3. In the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process, when the corresponding situation ends, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit is updated to the one corresponding to the situation that follows. The gaming machine according to Feature F2, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the feature F3, when each situation ends, in each situation process corresponding to the situation, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit is updated to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for making a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature F4. The first situation is a situation when the gaming situation is started, and the numerical information corresponding to the first situation is an initial value of the situation correspondence storage means. F2 or F3 Game machines.

  According to the feature F4, since the initial value of the situation correspondence storage means corresponds to the first situation, the numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means is not specially set after the storage means of the gaming machine is initialized. However, the first situation, which is the first situation in a specific gaming situation, can be achieved.

  Feature F5. In the process of updating the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means, at least one of initialization for the numerical information immediately before the update and addition of a predetermined value to the numerical information immediately before the update and subtraction of the predetermined value is executed. As described above, the game according to any one of features F2 to F4, wherein each division in the specific game situation including the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation is set. Machine.

  According to the feature F5, when updating the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit, it is only necessary to execute addition of a predetermined value, subtraction of the predetermined value, or initialization. The processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature F6. An acquisition process (step S1405 in the main MPU 92) for acquiring progress trigger information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to the upper working port 33 or winning to the lower working port 34). Information acquisition means (function to execute the hold information acquisition process in the main MPU 92),
Trigger information storage means (holding storage area 94b) for storing the progress trigger information acquired by the acquisition process;
Comprising the above-mentioned progress trigger information is a configuration that triggers the progress of the gaming situation,
The establishment of the acquisition condition is a configuration that occurs even during the progress of the specific gaming situation including the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation,
The acquisition process is set separately from each situation process executed with reference to numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means including the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F5, wherein:

  According to the feature F6, since the specific game situation progresses with the acquisition of progress trigger information as a trigger, the trigger for the progress becomes clear. Moreover, since the establishment of the acquisition condition occurs even during the progress of a specific game situation, the timing at which the progress opportunity information is acquired is wide. In this case, since the acquisition process for acquiring the progress opportunity information is set separately from each situation process executed with reference to the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means is set. It is not necessary to follow the situation that occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Feature F7. In at least two situations out of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation, an end condition for the situation is satisfied when a predetermined period corresponding to each situation has elapsed since the situation started. It is the composition which becomes
Each situation process execution means for executing each situation process corresponding to a plurality of situations for which an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has passed is a common period measurement when measuring the prescribed period. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that the means (a special figure special timer counter) is used.

  According to the feature F7, the number of period measuring means can be reduced. In addition, since the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation do not occur at the same time, even if a common period measuring unit is used, the period measuring unit is referred to in a plurality of situations at the same time. No, the processing configuration for using the period measuring means is not complicated.

  Feature F8. Separately from each situation process including the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process, a period update process (in the main MPU 92) that periodically updates the numerical information of the common period measurement means The gaming machine according to feature F7, comprising period update means (a function for executing timer update processing in the main MPU 92) for executing timer update processing.

  According to the feature F8, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which processing for updating the common period measurement unit is individually set for each status processing.

Feature F9. Predetermined execution conditions (elapse of demo wait time) are satisfied in some of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation (the situation where the special figure special electricity counter is “0”) In this case, the specific situation handling process (the processes in steps S2207 and S2208 in the main MPU 92) is executed, while the specific situation handling process is executed when the execution condition is met when the situation is not part of the situation. Specific situation execution means (function to execute demonstration display processing in the main MPU 92),
In any one of the characteristics F1 to F8, the specific situation execution unit is configured to identify whether or not the partial situation is by referring to numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F9, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit can be used to grasp whether or not it is time to execute the specific situation correspondence processing, and in order to use the timing to be executed The required storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which different information is set.

Feature F10. It is started on the basis that a predetermined start condition (acquisition of hold information) is established, and a predetermined end condition (end of game play effect or end of opening / closing execution mode) is established Specific game situations (game play effects and opening / closing execution modes) including the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation are executed as predetermined sections that are terminated based on different execution timings. Status) is set,
The numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means corresponding to each situation included in the specific gaming situation is set to be in ascending order or descending order according to the progress order of each situation,
Furthermore, the part of the situation constitutes a part of a continuous section in the specific game situation, and is a situation corresponding to a plurality of types of numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit,
The specific situation executing means specifies whether or not it is the partial situation by specifying whether or not the numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means is included in a specific numerical range. The gaming machine described in feature F9.

  According to the feature F10, the timing at which the specific situation handling process should be executed constitutes a part of a continuous section in the specific gaming situation and corresponds to a plurality of types of numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit. However, since the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means is set in ascending order or descending order according to the progress order of each situation, the numerical information is included in a specific numerical range instead of collating each numerical information individually. By specifying whether or not, it is possible to specify the timing for executing the specific situation handling process. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration required for such specification is achieved.

  Feature F11. The specific situation execution means is the partial situation by specifying whether the numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means is a small side or a large side based on a specific numerical value. Whether or not the gaming machine according to Feature F10.

  According to the feature F11, when specifying whether or not it is time to execute the specific situation handling process, there is only one target to be collated in the numerical information of the situation handling storage unit. This simplifies the processing configuration required for the identification.

Feature F12. A lottery execution for executing a lottery process (steps S1405 and S1503 in the main MPU 92) based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition (winning to the upper working port 33 or winning to the lower working port 34) is established. Means (function of executing the processes of steps S1405 and S1503 in the main MPU 92);
Based on the fact that the lottery condition has been established, the effect execution means (the symbol display device 41 and the main display unit 43) starts the effect, and ends the effect while maintaining the result corresponding to the result of the lottery process. A game time control means for controlling the effect execution means so that each game time effect is performed (function of executing steps S1307 to S1309 in the main MPU 92);
When the lottery process results in a winning result and the corresponding game-playing effect is finished, the special game state is switched to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player and when a predetermined finish condition is satisfied. State transition means for terminating the state (function of executing the processing of steps S1310 to S1313 in the main MPU 92);
With
The execution timings of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation are different in the gaming situation until the game times are rendered and the special gaming state is terminated when the lottery condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, wherein the gaming machine corresponds to a predetermined section.

  According to the feature F12, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for the process for advancing the gaming situation from when the effect for playing the game is started until the advantageous state is ended.

  The feature F group invention is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, a large number of game situations are set, and the transition of the game situation occurs based on the fact that the transition conditions corresponding to each are established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, for example, an internal lottery is performed based on the entrance of a game ball into a predetermined entrance part provided in a game area, and a game play in a game player device such as a display of variation in symbols on a liquid crystal display device or the like. When the result of the internal lottery is a winning result, the game turning operation is terminated in a state corresponding to the result, and a transition to the jackpot gaming state is known (for example, patents) Reference 1). In this case, a start waiting situation in which the game turning operation is not executed and the jackpot gaming state is not executed, a game playing situation in which the game turning action is executed, and the jackpot gaming state are set. The situation is set.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the jackpot gaming state proceeds by opening and closing the entrance opening provided in the gaming area a plurality of times, as the situation in the jackpot gaming state, the opening that opens the entrance hole A situation and a closed situation in which the entrance is maintained in a closed state between successive opening times are set.

  By the way, in the slot machine, although the contents of specific games are different, there are configurations in which a number of game situations are set such as a start waiting situation, a situation during game play, and a situation during jackpot gaming state. Are known.

  Each of the many situations as described above progresses by performing a process corresponding to each situation in a periodic process periodically executed by the control device. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the processing corresponding to the situation different from the situation where the user is currently staying from proceeding. Therefore, in order to avoid such an event, a flag is prepared corresponding to each situation, and in each process, the information stored in the flag is read and the current stay of the situation is read from the read information. A configuration in which a determination is made is known.

  Here, when the information stored in the flag is read and the process of determining the information is performed as described above, the process of reading and checking the flag is repeatedly executed within, for example, one processing period of the periodic process. The Rukoto. Then, the processing configuration becomes complicated.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Firing operation means (launching handle 55) operated to launch a game ball;
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward the game area by being in a driving state for driving the output unit;
A launch control means (a function for executing a launch control process in the main MPU 92, a power supply, and a launch control means for periodically launching a game ball by setting the launch means to the driving state based on the operation of the launch operation means. Launch control device 79);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The firing control means includes
A plurality of types of periods until permission to enter the driving state when an operation that should be in the driving state is performed on the firing operation unit in a situation where the firing unit is not in the driving state. Selection means for selecting from the information (function to execute the process of step S1104 in the main MPU 92);
A drive state setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1110 in the main MPU 92, power supply and launch control device 79) for setting the firing means in the drive state after a period selected by the selection means has elapsed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, the timing at which the launching unit enters the driving state with respect to the timing at which the actual launch operation is performed, even if the launch start timing of the game ball is intentionally operated through the operation timing of the launch operation unit. Since it is not uniquely defined, this intentional operation can be invalidated.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the selection means determines a period until permission to enter the driving state by lottery.

  According to the feature G2, it is possible to make the timing until the launching unit is in a driving state with respect to the timing at which the launch operation is performed, thereby more reliably invalidating the intentional operation. It becomes possible.

  Feature G3. When the driving state setting unit sets the emission unit to be in the driving state, a driving notification control unit that performs a predetermined notification corresponding to the setting is performed (the processing in step S1111 in the main MPU 92 is executed) A gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2.

  According to the feature G3, in a configuration in which the timing at which the launching unit is in the drive state is not unique with respect to the timing at which the launch operation is actually performed, a predetermined notification is performed when the drive state is set. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that such a non-unique configuration is not due to a failure.

  The invention of the feature group G is effective for the following problems.

  A pachinko machine, which is a type of gaming machine, has a launching operation device on the front surface of the gaming machine body. When the launching operation device is operated, the launching device operates, and a game ball is launched above the gaming area. Is done.

  A conventional launch operation device is provided with a base fixed to the gaming machine body, a front cover constituting the front portion of the launch operation device, and is rotatable between the base and the front cover. And an operation handle that is rotated at the time. The player adjusts the amount of rotation of the operation handle, and plays the game while maintaining the posture in which the operation handle is held at the rotation position where the desired flying distance is achieved.

  However, the act of intentionally operating the launch timing of the game ball through the operation timing of the launch operation device to cause the game ball grant rate to exceed the assumed rate at the game machine design stage, If this is the case, it will cause an unexpected disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to design the game ball grant rate in a state where the action is also assumed, the work at the design stage becomes complicated.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24b ... Radio wave detection sensor as abnormality detection means, 31 ... General winning opening, 31a-31c ... Winning opening detection sensor, 32 ... Variable winning apparatus, 32e ... Large winning opening detection sensor, 33 ... Upper operation opening , 33a ... Upper working port detection sensor, 34 ... Lower working port, 34c ... Lower working port detection sensor, 35 ... Through gate, 35a, 35b ... Gate detection sensor, 51 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 55 ... Launch handle, 79 ... Power source and launch control device, 92 ... main side MPU, 92a ... input port, 93 ... main side ROM, 94 ... main side RWM, 96 ... power failure monitoring board, 102 ... dispensing side MPU, 103 ... dispensing side ROM, 104 ... dispensing Side RWM, 114: power supply unit for power interruption, 122: winning device, 123 ... base body, 124 ... winning port, 125 ... opening / closing piece, 135 ... guide passage, 141 ... passing portion for winning, 44 ... Used passing section, 153 ... Rotating body, 155 ... Vibration detection sensor as abnormality detection means, SL1 ... First signal path as first communication means, SL3 ... Third signal path as second communication means , TC1 to TC10... Timer counter.

Claims (1)

Program storage means storing a processing program;
Control means for controlling the progress of the game by periodically executing periodic processing using the processing program stored in the program storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The program storage means has a first situation, a second situation, and a situation in which the periodic processing is executed a plurality of times when the situation does not occur at the same time in the game process and stays in each situation. Corresponding to each of the third situations, a processing program for the first situation, a processing program for the second situation, and a processing program for the third situation are stored,
A specific gaming situation is set that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
The first situation, the second situation, and the third situation respectively correspond to predetermined sections with different execution timings in the specific gaming situation,
The control means includes
An information acquisition means for executing an acquisition process for acquiring progress opportunity information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Trigger information storage means for storing the progress trigger information acquired by the acquisition process;
First situation process execution means for executing a first situation process for controlling the progress of the first situation using the processing program for the first situation;
A second situation process executing means for executing a second situation process for controlling the progress of the second situation using the processing program for the second situation;
Third situation process execution means for executing a third situation process for controlling the progress of the third situation using the processing program for the third situation;
Corresponding to each situation when the first situation, the storable der numerical information in a predetermined range including the numerical information corresponding to each of the second status and the third status is, the condition for each situation is established Situation correspondence storage means for updating the numerical information so as to become
To read out the numerical information stored in the situation corresponding storage means, reads out a processing program corresponding to the numerical information thus read out, one of the first status process, the second status process and the third status processing Means for reading the program to be executed,
With
In the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process, when the corresponding situation ends, the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage unit is updated to the one corresponding to the situation that follows. Yes,
In the process of updating the numerical information in the situation correspondence storage means, at least one of initialization for the numerical information immediately before the update and addition of a predetermined value to the numerical information immediately before the update and subtraction of the predetermined value is executed. As described above, each division in the specific game situation including the first situation, the second situation and the third situation is set,
The progress trigger information stored is a configuration that triggers the progress of the specific gaming situation,
The establishment of the acquisition condition is a configuration that occurs even during the progress of the specific gaming situation including the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation,
The acquisition process is set separately from each situation process executed with reference to numerical information of the situation correspondence storage means including the first situation process, the second situation process, and the third situation process. ,
In at least two situations out of the first situation, the second situation, and the third situation, an end condition for the situation is satisfied when a predetermined period corresponding to each situation has elapsed since the situation started. It is the composition which becomes
A configuration in which measurement of the predetermined period in a plurality of situations in which an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed is performed using a common period measuring unit,
The control means determines whether or not the measurement of the period in the period measurement means is completed before the program reading means executes the process of reading the processing program, and the measurement of the period is completed. A completion specifying means for setting “1” in the completion specifying storage means in which any one of the data “0” and “1” is set,
Whether each situation process execution unit that executes a situation process corresponding to a situation in which an end condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has passed sets whether or not “1” is set in the completion specifying storage unit By determining the above, it is specified whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed .

Images